Panasonic AJ HD1700 User Manual To The Ceb0c33f 1fab 4811 96e6 3330017ab52c

User Manual: Panasonic AJ-HD1700 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 134 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Thank you for purchasing this product.

Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.

Model AJ-

Operating Instructions

Digital HD

Video Cassette Recorder

VQT0E88

WARNING:

•

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR

SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS

EQUIPMENT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

• TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK

HAZARD, KEEP THIS EQUIPMENT AWAY

FROM ALL LIQUIDS—USE AND STORE

ONLY IN LOCATIONS WHICH ARE NOT

EXPOSED TO THE RISK OF DRIPPING OR

SPLASHING LIQUIDS, AND DO NOT PLACE

ANY LIQUID CONTAINERS ON TOP OF THE

EQUIPMENT.

For your safety (General)

indicates safety information.

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK

HAZARD AND ANNOYING INTERFERENCE,

USE THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES

ONLY.

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR SHOCK

HAZARD, REFER MOUNTING OF THE

OPTIONAL BOARD AND CHANGE OF

SWITCH SETTINGS INSIDE THE UNIT TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION:

Do not install or place this unit in a bookcase,

built-in cabinet or any other confined space in

order to maintain adequate ventilation. Ensure

that curtains and any other materials do not

obstruct the ventilation to prevent risk of

electric shock or fire hazard due to

overheating.

CAUTION:

EVEN WHEN THE POWER SWITCH IS IN

THE OFF POSITION, A SMALL CURRENT

FLOWS THE FILTER CIRCUIT.

CAUTION:

THE AC OUTLET (MAINS SOCKET) SHALL

BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND

SHALL BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.

THIS APPARATUS MUST BE GROUNDED

To ensure safe operation the three-pin plug must be

inserted only into a standard three-pin power outlet

(socket) which is effectively grounded through the

normal household wiring.

Extension cords used with the equipment must be

three-core and be correctly wired to provide

connection to the ground. Incorrectly wired extension

cords can be extremely hazardous.

The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily

does not imply that it is grounded, and the installation

is not necessarily safe. For your safety, if in any

doubt about the effective grounding of the equipment

or power outlet (socket), please consult a qualified

electrician.

Operating precaution

Operation near any appliance which generates

strong magnetic fields may give rise to noise in

the video and audio signals. If this should be the

case, deal with the situation by, for instance,

moving the source of the magnetic fields away

from the unit before operation.

CAUTION:

This apparatus can be operated at a voltage in the

range of 100 – 240 V AC.

Voltage other than 120 V is not intended for U.S.A.

and Canada.

CAUTION:

Operation at a voltage other than 120 V AC may

require the use of a different AC plug. Please contact

either a local or foreign Panasonic authorized service

center for assistance in selecting an alternate AC

plug.

For your safety

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,

within an equilateral triangle, is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric

shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (service) instructions in the

literature accompanying the appliance.

For U.S.A. and Canada

FCC Note:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

To assure continued compliance follow the attached

installation instructions and do not make any

unauthorized modifications.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed

to provide reasonable protection against harmful

interference when the equipment is operated in a

commercial environment. This equipment generates,

uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if

not installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful interference

to radio communications. Operation of this equipment

in a residential area is likely to cause harmful

interference in which case the user will be required to

correct the interference at his own expense.

For Europe

CAUTION:

DO NOT REMOVE PANEL COVER BY UN-

SCREWING

To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove

cover. No user serviceable parts inside.

indicates safety information.

Notice (U.S.A. only):

This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains

a small amount of mercury. It also contains lead

in some components. Disposal of these materials

may be regulated in your community due to

environmental considerations. For disposal or

recycling information please contact your local

authorities, or the Electronics Industries Alliance:

<http://www.eiae.org.>

FOR U.K. ONLY

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin

mains plug for your safety and convenience.

A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.

Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that

the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it

is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark Ïor the BSI mark Ìon the

body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must

ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.

If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used

until a replacement cover is obtained.

A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your

local Panasonic Dealer.

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE

FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN

THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG

CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A

DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE

CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP

SOCKET.

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring

code as shown below.

If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.

WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.

IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured

in accordance with the following code:

Green-and-Yellow: Earth

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

Caution for AC Mains Lead

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this

appliance may not correspond with the coloured

markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed

as follows:

• The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW

must be connected to the terminal in the plug which

is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol Ó

or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.

• The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected

to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the

letter N or coloured BLACK.

• The wire which is coloured BROWN must be

connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked

with the letter L or coloured RED.

FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.

This product is equipped with 2 types of AC mains cable. One is for continental Europe, etc. and the other one is only

for U.K.

Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.

FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC.

Not to be used in the U.K. FOR U.K. ONLY

If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket

outlet, it should be cut off and appropriate one fitted.

How to replace the fuse

1. Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver.

2. Replace the fuse.

Fuse

For your safety

Contents

For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

General outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

OFront panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

OTime code display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

ORear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

OExample of connections performed for

one VTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

OExample of connections performed for

two VTRs (deck-to-deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

OExample of system connections in

23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

OExample of system connections in

25 Hz (SD) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

OExample of connections with an

editing controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Concerning tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Turning on the power and inserting

the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

STOP and STANDBY modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Jog/shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Manual editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Preroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Automatic editing (deck-to-deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

OSwitch settings and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .29

OSelecting the editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

ORegistering the edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

OChecking the edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

OModifying edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

OPreviewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

OAutomatic editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

OReviewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Audio split editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Variable memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Function menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

OGeneral description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

OAllocating the function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

OHow to switch the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

OHOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

OVIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

OAUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

OTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

OCUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

ODIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

OMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

OASSEMBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

OINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59

OSETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU . . . . . . . . . . .60

OFILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

OPF1/PF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

OCARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69

O50P IN/OUT ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

System menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Setup menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

OBASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

OOPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

OINTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

OEDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

OTAPE PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

OTIME CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

OVIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

OAUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

OMENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

OConnections with Dolby-E components . . . . .104

OHow to switch the system frequency . . . . . . .105

OSelecting the recording/playback format

and sync signals which support the

operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

OMenu management accompanying

switching the system frequency . . . . . . . . . . .106

Time code and user’s bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

OTime code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

OUser’s bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111

OSetting the internal time code . . . . . . . . . . . .111

OSetting the external time code . . . . . . . . . . . .112

OCue time registration, preroll and cue-up

(These functions work only on the HOME,

PF1 and PF2 screens.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

OTime code and user’s bit playback . . . . . . . .112

Superimpose screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Selecting the audio recording channels and

monitor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Display saving function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Video head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

ODIAG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

OWarning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

OError messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

RS-232C interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Connector signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

General outline

The model AJ-HD1700 is a DVCPRO HD-LP format

HD digital video cassette recorder which uses 1/4˝

wide compact cassette tapes.

It can record, play back and edit 1080/59.94i (60i),

720/59.94p (60p) and 1080/50i HD signals and also

play back existing DVCPRO (25 Mbps or 50 Mbps)

tapes.

It is also capable of converting from sources with a

720/24p over 60p (720/25p over 60p) format recorded

using a variable frame rate camera into a 1080/24psf

(1080/25psf) format and outputting the resulting

signals, thus fulfilling the needs of applications in the

cinema film production field.

Further, the HD-SD conversion facility of its format

converter, which is provided as a standard accessory,

extends the uses of this VTR to encompass

interfacing with existing SD systems and into

configuring of HD systems.

By mobilizing highly efficient digital compression

technology to assure a high picture quality, this VTR

significantly minimizes deterioration in the picture

quality and sound quality during the dubbing process.

It features a compact size of 4U and a lightweight

design that enables it to be carried around with ease,

and to be readily installed in a 19-inch rack.

The equipment is set up using an interactive system

whereby the operator manipulates the function

buttons on the front panel and observes the menu

screens on the front panel’s LED monitor.

In terms of the editing features, this VTR is capable of

both assemble editing and insert editing.

Standard accessories

Power cord (AJ-HD1700P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1

Power cord (AJ-HD1700E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2

Features

Time codes

This VTR comes with a built-in time code generator

(TCG)/time code reader (TCR).

In addition to the internal time code, an external time code

can also be input and recorded as the LTC on the VTR.

Multi-functional interfaces

• Serial digital input/output connector

The VTR comes with an HD component serial interface

input/output connector. This one BNC connector enables

HD component video signals and 8-channels digital audio

signals to be interfaced. (SMPTE 292M, 299M, BTA S-

004)

It is also equipped with an HD/SD format converter as a

standard accessory so that SD component serial signals

can also be output. (SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-A, 294M)

• Analog video output connector

Composite signals are output during DVCPRO50- or

DVCPRO-compatible playback, DV playback, DVCAM

playback and down-conversion.

• AES/EBU audio input/output connectors

Digital audio input/output connectors for 8 channels are

featured as a standard accessory.

• SDTI input/output connector

Use of the SDTI board (optional accessory) enables

interfacing with the compressed component signals still in

their original form. (SMPTE 305M, 321M)

• SD signal up-conversion and recording

Using the input up-converter board (optional accessory),

SD component serial signals (SMPTE 259M-C) can be

up-converted and recorded as HD signals.

• 9-pin RS-422A and RS-232C remote control

connectors

In addition to the standard 9-pin serial remote (RS-422A)

control connector, the VTR is provided with RS-232C and

50-pin parallel remote control connectors.

The RS-422A facility enables parallel operation if a loop

connection has been established between the VTR and

another VTR.

8-channel high-sound-quality digital audio

The 8-channel PCM audio feature allows for not only

independent editing but mixing as well on all 8 channels.

One channel is provided for the analog cue track.

Menu-driven setup

The setup settings, which are conducted prior to operating

the VTR, are performed while the operator views the setup

menus either on the VTR’s LCD monitor or on a TV monitor.

Multi-functional front panel with LCD monitor

The front panel’s multiple functions, including the LCD

monitor for monitoring images, the function buttons and

large-size display panel, are contained within the 4U

dimensions and designed to improve operating ease.

Compact size and light weight

This is a 4U digital VTR. Using the rack-mounting adapters

(AJ-MA75P: optional accessory), it can also be easily

housed in a 19-inch rack.

Up to 126 minutes of recording

Using the DVCPRO HD-LP recording system, up to 126

minutes of material can be recorded on the newly developed

1/4˝ XL-size cassette tape.

High picture quality

The VTR’s high picture quality is achieved by 4:2:2 HD

component signal recording using a recording rate (100

Mbps) which is 4 times higher than that of the existing

DVCPRO format.

1080i/720p (*1), 59.94 Hz/60 Hz/50 Hz signal

switching

By making menu selections, the signals of the respective

formats can be recorded and played back.

*1: When the system frequency of 50 Hz has been selected,

recording and playback using the 720p format are not possible.

Frame rate conversion function

By making menu selections, the VTR can output signals

after converting them to the 1080/24psf (25psf) format when

it plays back a tape recorded by a variable frame rate

camera at a frame rate of 24fps (25fps).

SDI interface

The VTR comes with an HD serial digital interface as a

standard accessory.

Playback compatibility with DVCPRO systems

Besides DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback, the VTR

can also play back tapes which have been recorded using

the existing DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50 and DVCPRO

systems.

Consumer-use DV tapes (SP) and DVCAM tapes can also

be played back on this VTR.

Digital slow motion/dial jog

Panasonic’s unique digital slow motion technology enables

clear playback (of tapes recorded using the DVCPRO HD-

LP system) at speeds ranging from j1kto i2k.

<Note>

Some noise may occur during slow playback (using an

external controller) at speeds of almost exactly j1k or

i2k.

Search speed

Search speed enables tapes (recorded using the HD-LP

system) to be played back with color images at speeds of up

to 100 times in the forward or reverse direction.

Front panel

1POWER switch

2Audio level meter

The audio information is displayed here.

• The levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5,

CH6, CH7 and CH8 PCM audio signals and level

of the CUE track signal are displayed here.

• The levels of the input signals are displayed

during recording and when E-E is selected.

During playback, the levels of the playback

signals are displayed. In the INPUT CHECK

status, the levels of the input signals are

displayed for CH1 to CH8.

• Input signal display for each of the channels

The indicators for the selected input signals light.

(SDI lights when the SD SDI input signal is

selected.)

If an input signal has been selected but it has not

actually been input,the AES, HDSDI, SDI or

SDTI indicator will blink if a signal corresponding

to one of these indicators was selected whereas

the ANA indicator will remain lighted if it was an

ANA signal that was selected.

When the internal signal (INT SG) has been

selected, all the AES, ANA, HDSDI, SDI and

SDTI indicators light.

All the indicator are off in the 23/24 Hz mode or

25 Hz (HD or SD) mode.

3Cassette insertion slot

If the slot’s orange plate is visible, it means that a

cassette tape is already inserted.

4EJECT button

When this button is pressed, the cassette is

unloaded, and a few seconds later it is ejected

automatically.

When CTL appears on the counter display, the

display is reset.

5Headphones jack

The sound heard during recording, playback or

editing can be monitored through headphones

when stereo headphones are connected to this

jack.

6Volume control dial

This control dial is used to adjust the volume level

of the headphones and monitor output.

Whether the volume level of the monitor output is to

be coupled together with that of the headphones to

this dial or separated can be selected using the

setup menu item No.712 (MONI OUT). (Note that

the volume level of the headphones is coupled at all

times.) When the volume levels have been

separated, the UNITY value (prescribed value)

applies to the monitor output.

7Channel condition lamps

These lamps light to indicate the error rate

status.

(Green “amber “red)

Green: This lights when the error rates for the

video and audio playback signals are both at

acceptable levels.

Amber: This lights when the error rate for either the

video or audio playback signals has deteriorated.

The playback picture and sound remain

unaffected even while this lamp is lighted.

Red: This lights when correction or interpolation

has been engaged for either the video or audio

playback signals.

Parts and Their Functions

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

1 65 2 3 47

- -

•4

AES ANA

HD SDI SDTI

•3

•2

•1

L R

•16

AES ANA

HD SDI SDTI

•12

•8

•4

L R

Reference level (j20 dB)

(AJ-HD1700P)

Left (L) and right (R)

monitor channel displays

Input signal display

Level meter

Reference level (j18 dB)

(AJ-HD1700E)

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

< 9 ;8 : =

Front panel

8MONITOR SELECT buttons

These buttons are used to select the audio signals

which are to be output to the monitor L and R

connectors and headphones jack.

•When OFF has been selected as the M

MIX setting on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu

(factory setting):

Each time the L (or R) button is pressed, the

signal to be output to the monitor L (or R)

connector is changed in the following sequence

and displayed on the audio level meter: CH1 >

CH2 >CH3>CH4 >CH5 >CH6 >CH7 >

CH8 >CUE >CH1, etc.

•

When L, R or L/R has been selected as the

M MIX setting on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu:

At this setting, the signals of a multiple number of

channels can be mixed and output.

When the number key corresponding to the

channel whose signals are to be monitored is

pressed while the L (or R) button is held down,

that channel is selected and its signals are

displayed on the audio level meter. (By

performing the same operation, the selected

channel can be de-selected.)

However, a maximum of only two channels from

CH1 to CH4 and a maximum of only two

channels from CH5 to CH8 can be selected.

Example of channels which can be selected:

CH1 iCH3 iCH5 iCH8 “OK

CH1 + CH2 + CH4 “NG

9METER (FULL/FINE) selector button

This button is used to select the scale display for the

audio level meter.

FULL mode: Depending on the setting selected for the

setup menu item No.763 (METER SCALE)*, either the

j¶ to 0 dB (reference level: j20 dB/j18 dB**) or j¶

to i20 dB (reference level: 0 dB) range is displayed.

FINE mode: Depending on the setting selected for the

setup menu item No.763 (METER SCALE)*, either the

j24 to j15 dB (reference level: j20 dB/j18 dB**) or

j4 to i5 dB (reference level: 0 dB) range is displayed

on a scale with 0.5 dB increments.

* This menu is not displayed for AJ-HD1700E.

** j20 dB is applied for AJ-HD1700P and j18 dB is for AJ-HD1700E.

Parts and Their Functions

:REMOTE buttons and RS-232C display

These buttons are used when this VTR is to be

controlled from an external component using the

REMOTE, RS-232C or parallel connector.

9P: When this button is pressed for 2 or more

seconds, its LED lights, and the 9-pin REMOTE

connector is selected.

50P: When this button is pressed for 2 or more

seconds, its LED lights, and it is possible to control

the VTR from a unit which has been connected using

the 50-pin parallel mode connector.

RS-232C display: This LED lights when communi-

cation has been enabled between the VTR and the

unit which has been connected to the RS-232C

connector.

;AUTO OFF lamp

This lamp lights when a problem has occurred with

the VTR’s operation, and details of the problem

appear on the time code display.

<LCD monitor

This monitor is used to check the tape’s playback

pictures and EE pictures.

When an HD tape is played back, the signals are down-

converted and displayed in the letter-box screen format.

When an SD tape is played back, the signals are

displayed using a 4:3 aspect ratio.

On-screen menus can also be displayed on the monitor.

If the VTR is left in a state where no controls on the front

panel are operated or where the tape is not running, the

monitor display is automatically turned off in order to

protect the monitor. When the next VTR operation is

started, the monitor display comes back on.

<Note>

Although the LCD monitor has been manufactured

using technology with extremely high levels of

precision, some pixels may be missing from parts of

the screen or some pixels may remain lighted.

These missing or lighted pixels will not be recorded.

It should also be borne in mind that this is not

indicative of a malfunction.

=Function buttons

These buttons are used to perform the operations of

the function menus (see page 38 for details) and

setup menus.

: This is used to switch the pages of the current

function menu ( to ).

to : These are used to change the settings of

the setting items enclosed in the frame at the bottom of

the time code display.

To change a setting, keep pressing the corresponding

function button ( to ) until the desired

numerical value appears; alternatively, press the

corresponding function button to highlight the setting of

the setting item, and then turn the ADJUST dial until

the desired numerical value is obtained.

F6F1

SHIFT

Front panel

>Time code display

The data, VTR status information, tape format

information or warning information which

corresponds to the direct menu buttons @appear

on this display. (See page 16 for details of the

displays.)

?UNITY lamps

VIDEO UNITY lamp

This lights if the UNITY level applies for all the HD

or SD output levels.

AUDIO UNITY lamp

This lights if the UNITY level applies for the PCM

or CUE AUDIO input or output level. (The lighting

of the lamp complies with the setting selected for

setup menu item No.142 (AUDIO UNITY).)

@Direct menu buttons

These buttons are used to switch directly to the

function menus on the time code display.

HOME: The most basic settings of recording,

playback and time code operations are selected

on this menu.

VIDEO: The basic input and output settings for the

video signals are selected on this menu. The

level of the HD output signals can also be

adjusted on this screen.

AUDIO: The basic input and output settings for the

audio signals are selected on this menu.

PF1: This enables user-defined menu items to be

registered in the function keys.

PF2: This enables user-defined menu items to be

registered in the function keys.

TC: The settings related to the time code are

selected on this menu. Superimposing the time

code on the display can also be set on this

screen.

Parts and Their Functions

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

> A C

? B

CUE: This enables up to 60 cue points to be set. In

the PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6 cue points on

each page are provided so that the cue points can

be managed on a page-by-page basis.

DIAG: This enables the warnings and hour meter

displays to be checked. On the SHIFT screen, the

error log files can be checked and deleted.

MENU: On this menu, it is possible to transfer

operation to the screen on which operations

(adjustments and saving data in or loading it from

the internal memory and IC card) relating to the

SYSTEM and SETUP menus are to be performed.

See page 38 and following for further details on

each of the function menus.

AASSEM button

This button is used to perform assemble editing.

When it is pressed, the <ASSEMBLE> menu

appears on the time code display. Setting ASSEM

to ON using enables assemble editing, and the

lamp of the ASSEM button lights.

Even after operation is transferred by another direct

menu, the assemble mode will remain established

while the ASSEM button lamp is lighted.

To release the assemble mode, select OFF as the

ASSEM setting on the <ASSEMBLE> menu.

The ASSEM button lamp now goes off and the

assemble mode is released.

BINSERT button

This button is used to perform insert editing.

When it is pressed, the <INSERT> menu appears

on the time code display, and the function menu for

selecting the signals to be edited is displayed.

To select the signals to be edited, press the

function key, and highlight the display. The

highlighted display indicates that those signals are

selected.

To release the selection, press the same function

key again.

Use to to select the V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and

CUE signals; use + to to select the

A5, A6, A7, A8 and TC signals.

CADJUST dial

This is used for the menu and other operations.

F6F2SHIFT

F6F1

Front panel

DSHTL button

For shuttle playback, press this button and proceed

with the operation using the search dial G.

When the dial is turned to the desired position, the

tape is played at the speed corresponding to the

angle to which the dial has been turned. A still

picture appears when the dial is set to the center

position.

EJOG button

For jog playback, press this button and proceed

with the operation using the search dial G.

The tape is played at a speed within the speed

range set using setup menu items No.310 (JOG

FWD MAX) and No.311 (JOG REV MAX) in

accordance with the speed at which the dial is

turned.

FVAR button

For VAR playback, press this button and proceed

with the operation using the search dial G.

When the dial is turned all the way in the

counterclockwise direction, the tape speed is set to

j4.9k, when it is set to the center position, it is set

to still picture, and when it is turned all the way in

the clockwise direction, it is set to i4.9k.

The SLOW speed can be selected using setup

menu items No.308 (VAR FWD MAX) and No.309

(VAR REV MAX).

GSearch dial

This dial is used to locate the edit points.

Whether the dial is to be enabled by pressing the

SHTL, JOG or VAR button or whether searches are

to be enabled simply by turning the dial can be

selected using setup menu item No.100 (SEARCH

ENA).

Parts and Their Functions

HREV, STILL and FWD lamps

These lamps light to reflect the way in which the

search dial is operated.

REV: This lights when the dial is turned

counterclockwise, and the tape runs in the REV

direction while the SHTL, JOG or VAR button

lamp is lighted.

STILL: While the JOG button lamp is lighted, this

lights when the dial rotation is stopped, and the

tape also stops running.

In the SHTL or VAR mode, it lights when the dial

is at the still-picture position.

FWD: This lights when the dial is turned clockwise,

and the tape runs in the FWD direction while the

SHTL, JOG or VAR button lamp is lighted.

IAudio input and output level control dials

These are used to adjust the recording or playback

levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7

and CH8 PCM audio signals.

• Switching between the LOCK or UNLOCK

status for the volume level operations

When a dial is pressed, the LED above the dial

either lights (LOCK) or goes off (UNLOCK).

In the LOCK (lighted) status, only the display

segments corresponding to the current audio

level light, and the audio level remains

unchanged even when the dial is turned.

In the UNLOCK (off) status, the display

segments corresponding to the current audio

level and all the display segments below light,

and the audio level can be changed.

• Switching between UNITY or VAR

UNITY or VAR can be selected when the dial

knob is pressed while holding down the key

among the number keys in the UNLOCK status.

The position of the segment lighted at the center

indicates the UNITY level.

• Switching between REC or PB

The AUTO, REC or PB volume level function can

be selected using of “AUDIO SHIFT2” on the

AUDIO function menu.

With AUTO, the recording controls are

automatically selected during recording or in the

EE or INPUT CHECK status, and the playback

controls are automatically selected during

playback.

• Switching between CH1jCH4 and CH5jCH8

The AUDIO CH SELECT Jis used to switch

between these two sets of channels.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

H D E F

GI J

NPREROLL button

This button is used to locate where a transmission

or manual editing starts on the tape.

When it is pressed, the tape travels to the preroll

point and it stops there.

When the cue time has been registered on the

HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen:

The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time

using the preroll time which was set using .

(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.

When the search mode is established on the

CUE screen:

The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point

using the preroll time which was set using

(CU-ROL) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

The preroll operation is not performed when the

selected cue point has not been registered or

when the cue point registration mode is

established.

In all other situations:

The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point

(or the current tape position when the IN point has

not been registered) using the preroll time which

was set using [(PREROL) on the <HOME

SHIFT> menu.

If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN

point has not been registered, the current tape

position is automatically registered as the IN point

(but only when ENA has been selected as the

setup menu item No.305 (AUTO ENTRY) setting).

When the PREROLL button is pressed together

with the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the tape

can be cued up to the registered point concerned.

To cue up the tape for the cue time registered on

the HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen, press the

PREROLL button while holding down the key

among the number keys.

OIN (A IN), SET and OUT (A OUT) buttons

When the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button is pressed

together with the SET button, the IN (A IN) or OUT (A

OUT) point is registered.The A IN and A OUT buttons

are used to register audio IN and OUT points that

differ from the corresponding video points during

audio split editing.

When an IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point has been

registered, the lamp of the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT)

button which has registered that point lights. When

these buttons are pressed after points have been

registered, the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point value

appears on the counter display.

When the button is pressed while holding down the

IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the registration of

the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point is cleared.

Front panel

JAudio channel selector button

Use this button to select whether the audio controls

for channels CH1 to CH4 or for channels CH5 to

CH8 are to be controlled.

Each time it is pressed, the channel display LED

above the audio control is selected.

KNumber keys

Use these keys to input the numerical values of the

CUE points, edit points, etc.

By pressing a number keys from to while the

key is held down, alphabet letters from A to F

which are used for the user’s bit or letters from A to

Z which are used to compose filenames can be

input.

Since a multiple number of letters are allocated to

each number key, keep tapping the number key

until the desired letter is selected. To change the

input position, use the ADJUST dial, and then

proceed with the input.

LPREVIEW/REVIEW button

PREVIEW: When the button is pressed after an edit

point has been registered, the tape travels and the

editing can be previewed without actually

performing the editing.

If the button is pressed when the IN point has not

been registered, the point where it was pressed is

registered as the IN point, and preview is

executed using this IN point.

REVIEW: When the button is pressed after a

section has been edited, the just edited section is

played back, and it can be reviewed on the

recorder’s monitor.

MAUTO EDIT button

When this button is pressed after the edit points

have been registered, automatic editing is initiated.

If the button is pressed when the IN point has not

been registered, automatic editing is initiated with

the point where the button was pressed serving as

the IN point.

Parts and Their Functions

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

J MK O

Front panel

PTRIM buttons

These buttons are used to make fine adjustments to the

IN or OUT point.

By pressing the ior jbutton while the IN button or OUT

button is held down, the registered edit point can be

adjusted in 1-frame increments. When the ibutton is

pressed, the point is moved ahead by one frame;

conversely, when the jbutton is pressed, it is moved

back by one frame.

The playback phase can be adjusted by pressing the i

or jbutton while holding down the PLAY button.

QREW button

When this button is pressed, the tape is rewound.

The rewinding speed can be selected using setup menu

item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).

RSTOP button

When this button is pressed, the tape stops traveling, and

if TAPE is selected as the OUTPUT setting on the

<HOME> menu, still pictures can be monitored.

Even in the stop mode, the drum continues to rotate, and

the tape remains tightly wound around the drum.

Therefore, when the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond

a specific period of time, it is automatically set to the

standby OFF mode in order to protect the tape. The VTR

is set to the stop mode immediately after the cassette has

been installed.

SFF button

When this button is pressed, the tape is fast forwarded.

The fast forwarding speed can be selected using setup

menu item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).

TEDIT button

This button is pressed together with the PLAY button

during playback to initiate manual editing.

When the button is pressed in the stop mode, the input

signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE> menu

or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the E-E mode.

Parts and Their Functions

When the STOP button is pressed, the original picture

and sound are restored.

During playback, search, fast forwarding or rewinding, the

input signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE>

menu or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the E-E

mode while the button is held down.

<Note>

No guarantees are made for the sound played back in the

search mode.

PLAY button

Press this button to start playback.

When this button is pressed together with the REC

button, recording starts; when this button is pressed

together with the EDIT button during playback, manual

editing starts.

However, manual editing will not be initiated if the servo

is not locked. When only the PLAY button is pressed

during manual editing, editing is exited, and the playback

mode is established.

REC button

When this button is pressed together with the PLAY

button, recording starts.

SERVO lamp

This lamp lights when the drum servo or capstan servo

locks.

REC INHIBIT lamp

This lights or goes off in accordance with the status of the

accidental erasure prevention tab on the cassette tape

and the setting which has been selected for REC

INH on the <HOME> menu. Recording onto the tape is

inhibited while the lamp is lighted.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

T XW

R S V

Cassette tape’s

accidental erasure

prevention tab status

REC INH

menu setting

REC INHIBIT

lamp status Description of

operation

Recording

disabled __ Lighted*

(or blinks slowly).

All recording operations

are inhibited.

Recording

enabled

OFF Off

All recording operations

are permitted.

ALL Lighted

All recording operations

are inhibited.

PRE Blinks rapidly

Recording operations

involving the overwriting

of existing material are

inhibited.

NORM Blinks rapidly

Normal recording

operations are inhibited.

Editing is possible.

V/CTL Blinks rapidly

Recording of video

signals and CTL signals

are inhibited.

* Whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to light or blink is selected by

the No.114 REC INH LAMP setup menu item setting.

Front panel

YSTANDBY button

The same tape tension is applied as in the regular

stop mode. While the head drum is rotating, the

button’s lamp lights to indicate that the standby ON

mode is now established.

If the button is pressed in the stop mode, the

standby OFF mode is established followed by the

half loading mode. At this time, its lamp goes off.

When the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond a

specific period of time, it is automatically set to the

standby OFF mode in order to protect the tape.

In the standby OFF mode, if this button or the

STOP button is pressed, the VTR is set to the

standby ON mode. If a button other than the

STOP button is pressed, the VTR is set to the

mode that corresponds to the button pressed.

The time taken by the VTR to transfer to the

standby OFF mode can be selected using a setup

menu item.

Parts and Their Functions

ZPLAYER and RECORDER buttons

These buttons are operated if the VTR is to be used

as a recorder to conduct editing operations with a

VTR equipped with an RS-422A serial interface

remote control connector (9 pins). Neither button

works when the VTR is used on its own.

PLAYER: When this button is pressed, its lamp

lights to indicate that the player connected to the

VTR can be operated by remote control. The

VTR’s editing and tape transport system buttons

can now be used to control the player.

RECORDER: When this button is pressed, its lamp

lights to indicate that the editing and tape

transport system buttons can now be used to

operate the recorder (this VTR).

• When the PLAYER button or RECORDER button

is pressed while ENA has been selected as the

setup menu item No.200 (PARA RUN) setting,

the lamps of both buttons light to indicate that the

VTR now serves as the master unit for parallel

run operations. However, when this setting is

used, it is no longer possible to perform external

control from the REMOTE connector (9 pins).

[INPUT CHECK button

Only while this button is held down are the input

signals from the monitor output connector output to

enable the input video and audio signals to be

monitored.

The time code generator can be checked on the

time code display.

Select LATCH as the setup menu item No.517

(TCG OUT) setting in order to continue displaying

the time code generator value even after the INPUT

CHECK button has been released.

<Note>

The INPUT CHECK function does not work for the

CUE signal and SDTI signals. Input signals can be

monitored in the E-E mode.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

CH12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Y [Z

Front panel

INPUT CHECK output specifications

VIDEO (59/60 Hz mode)

Parts and Their Functions

AUDIO

Output system

MONITOR L

HD SDI (MONITOR)

(embedded audio)

SD SDI (MONITOR)

(embedded audio)

MONITOR (L, R) selection

CH1 to CH8

Audio input which has been

set by the channels selected

as L channels*2

Same as main

system*1

Same as main

system*1

Same as main system*1*3

CUE

MONITOR R

HEAD PHONE L

Audio input which has been

set by the channels selected

as R channels*2

Audio input which has been

set by the channels selected

as L channels*2

Same as main

system*1

Same as main

system*1

HEAD PHONE R Audio input which has been

set by the channels selected

as R channels*2

<Notes>

• The AJ-UC1700G (optional accessory) is required to

select the SD SDI input signals.

• The AJ-YAC150P (optional accessory) is required to

select the SDTI input signals.

• When the INT SG input signal is selected, the signals are

selected by menu item No.601.

• When the 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode is

selected, the INPUT CHECK operation is not performed.

* When the SDTI input is selected, the INPUT CHECK operation is

not performed.

*1: The INPUT CHECK operation is not performed. The signals

corresponding to the VTR operation mode are output.

*2: This is set using setup menu items No.713 to 724. However,

the INPUT CHECK operation is not performed when video

input SDTI is selected.

*3: Noise may occur if the video input and OUTREF signals are

not synchronized.

Output system

HD SDI

(MONITOR)

(59.94Hz/60Hz)

Input selection

(MENU 600)

INT SG

(59.94Hz/

60Hz)

INT SG

(selected

signal)

HD SDI

(input signal)

MUTE

(BLACK)

Same as

main system*

HD SDI

(59.94Hz/

60Hz)

SD SDI

(59.94Hz) SDTI

(59.94 Hz)

SD SDI

(MONITOR)

(59.94Hz)

MUTE

(BLACK)

MUTE

(BLACK)

SD SDI

(input signal)

Same as

main system*

LCD

(MONITOR)

(59.94Hz/60Hz)

INT SG

(selected

signal)

HD SDI

(input signal)

SD SDI

(input signal)

Same as

main system*

VIDEO OUT3

(59.94Hz)

Same as

main system*

Same as

main system*

Same as

main system*

Same as

main system*

VIDEO (50 Hz mode)

Output system

HD SDI

(MONITOR)

(50Hz)

Input selection

(MENU 600)

INT SG

(50Hz)

INT SG

(selected

signal)

HD SDI

(input signal)

MUTE

(BLACK)

HD SDI

(50Hz) SD SDI

(50Hz)

SD SDI

(MONITOR)

(50Hz)

MUTE

(BLACK)

MUTE

(BLACK)

SD SDI

(input signal)

LCD

(MONITOR)

(50Hz)

INT SG

(selected

signal)

HD SDI

(input signal)

SD SDI

(input signal)

VIDEO OUT3

(50Hz)

Same as

main system*

Same as

main system*

Same as

main system*

1Cue time display

The currently registered cue time appears here.

(For details of the cue time operations, refer to “Cue

time registration, preroll and cue-up” on page 112.)

Cue time operations can be performed on the

HOME, PF1 and PF2 screens only.

2Operation mode (speed) display

The current operation mode (including the speed

display) appears here.

EJECT:

Eject mode

STANDBY OFF:

Standby OFF mode

T.RELEASE:

Tension release mode

STOP:

Stop mode

PREROLL:

Preroll mode

PLAY:

Playback mode

PLAYi:

Special playback (playback phase adjustment)

mode (in FWD direction)

PLAYj:

Special playback (playback phase adjustment)

mode (in REV direction)

REC:

Recording mode

JOG (REV/STILL/FWD):

Jog mode

VAR (speeds from j4.9kto i4.9k):

Variable mode

SHTL (speeds from j32.kto i32.0k):

Shuttle mode

FF:

Fast forwarding mode

REW:

Rewinding mode

EDIT:

Editing mode

AUTO EDIT:

Automatic editing mode

PREVIEW:

Preview mode

REVIEW:

Review mode

• When “ON” has been selected as the [F]

(VARMEM) setting on the <HOME SHIFT>

menu:

DSPD (speeds from j1.0 to i2.0)

With the initial speed setting of the variable

memory

DSMP (speeds from j1.0 to i2.0)

In the playback speed memory mode of the

variable memory

DPLY (speeds from j1.0 to i2.0)

In the variable memory playback mode

DPRV (speeds from j1.0 to i2.0)

In the variable memory editing preview mode

DEDT (speeds from j1.0 to i2.0)

In the variable memory editing execution mode

Parts and Their Functions

Time code display

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

3Time counter display

CTL: CTL counter data

TCG: Time code data of time code generator

UBG: User’s bit data of time code generator

tcg: When the time code data of the time

code generator is preset

ubg: When the user’s bit data of the time

code generator is preset

TCR/T¢R: Time code data of the time code reader

UBR/U¢R: User’s bit data of the time code reader

If the time code data or user’s bit data could not be

read properly, “T¢R” or “U¢R” appears on the

display and, if the CTL signal is present, the time

code data is supplemented by this signal.

4Variable memory mode indicator

This is displayed when “ON” has been selected as

the (VARMEM) setting on the <HOME SHIFT>

menu.

While VM is lighted, variable memory operations

can be performed at any time. (For details, refer to

the “Variable memory function” on page 36.)

5Back page menu indicator

6Function button operation inhibited indicator

This is displayed when the button is pressed

while the button is held down. When it appears,

the operation of the function buttons can be

inhibited. When the button is pressed again

while the button is held down, the display is

cleared, and it becomes possible to operate the

function buttons.

Parts and Their Functions

Time code display

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00.

Field marks

“ ”: 1st field

“ . ”: 2nd field

(These marks are not displayed at any

speed above w0.3k.)

Drop frame marks:

“ : ”: Non-drop frame

“ . ”: Drop frame

(59/60 Hz mode only)

Rear panel

1AC IN socket

Using the power cord supplied, connect one end to

this socket and the other end to the power outlet.

2SIGNAL GND terminal

This is connected to the signal ground terminal on

the component connected to this VTR in order to

minimize noise. It is not a safety ground.

3Fuse holder

A fuse is inserted here.

4Fan

The fan is used to cool down the VTR.

If the fan has been stopped due to some kind of

problem, “W” appears on the time code display and

a beeping sound is heard.

If the VTR is made to continue operating in the

warning status, the temperature inside the deck

rises, and when it exceeds the safety temperature,

all the VTR’s operations will be shut down.

5TIME CODE IN connector

This connector is used to record an external time

code onto the tape.

6TIME CODE OUT connector

During playback, the playback time code is output

through this connector. During recording, the time

code generated by the internal time code generator

is output.

7CUE IN connector

The analog signals to be recorded on the CUE

tracks are input through this connector.

Audio signals from a microphone can also be

recorded by selecting the j60 dB input mode for

setup menu item No.704 (CUE IN LV).

Parts and Their Functions

8CUE OUT connector

The analog signals recorded on the CUE tracks are

output through this connector.

9MONITOR OUT connectors

The CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7 and

CH8 PCM audio signals or CUE signals are output

through these connectors.

:ANALOG AUDIO IN connectors

These are the analog audio input connectors (for

CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4).

;ANALOG AUDIO OUT connectors

The analog audio signals (CH1, CH2, CH3 and

CH4) are output through these connectors.

HD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO/VIDEO

IN/OUT connector/ACTIVE THRU

The HD digital component audio and video signals

complying with the SMPTE 292M and 299M

standards are input and output through this

connector.

Signals with the time code, menu or other

superimposed information are output from the HD

SDI MONITOR.

For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK

output table on page 15.

=SDTI IN and OUT connectors (SDTI, optional

accessory)*1, SD SDI IN/ACTIVE THRU (SD up-

converter, optional accessory)*2

*1: These connectors handle compressed data

input and output signals complying with the

SMPTE 305M and 321M standards.

*2: These input connectors enable SD SDI signals

complying with the SMPTE 259M-C standard to

be up-converted to HD signals and recorded.

<Notes>

• The optional AJ-UC1700G SD serial digital input

board and optional AJ-YAC150P SDTI input

board cannot be installed at the same time.

Install one or the other.

• SDTI does not function when the 25 Hz (HD or

SD) or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the

system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

setting.

PUSHPUSH

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

PUSH PUSH PUSH

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

4 45

12 3

9 <

Rear panel

>SD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO and

VIDEO OUT connectors

The digital component audio and video signals

complying with the SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-A or

294M standard are output from these connectors.

They are output during DVCPRO25M, 50M, DV or

DVCAM interchangeable playback or when signals

are down-converted and output. Signals containing

TC, menu or other superimposed information can

be output from the SD SDI MONITOR.

Using setup menu item No.606 (SD MONI O SEL),

it is also possible to make the SD SDI MONITOR

output the same output as SD SDI OUT1 (no

information superimposed).

When “SD SDI” has been selected as the (VID

IN) setting on the <VIDEO> menu and “THRU” has

been selected as the No.107 (EE MODE SEL)

setting, no information is superimposed onto the SD

SDI MONITOR output signals in the EE mode, and

the same output as SD SDI OUT1 is delivered.

• The AJ-UC1700G optional board is required in

order to select “SD SDI” as the (VID IN)

setting on the <VIDEO> menu.

• For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK

output table on page 15. Note that the signals

are muted during line conversion.

<Note>

In the 23/24 Hz mode, the system phase of the SD

SDI output and analog composite video output is

subject to change when the tape has been set to

travel at the normal speed (1k) so that the HD SDI

output and phase will be aligned.

?ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT connectors

The analog composite video signals are output through

these connectors. They are output during DVCPRO25M,

50M, DV or DVCAM interchangeable playback or when

signals are down-converted and output.

Video signals containing superimposed information can

be output through the VIDEO OUT 3 connector. Whether

the superimposing is to be set ON or OFF is selected

using the setup menu item No.005 (SUPER).

The waveform monitor (WFM) signal can be output from

the VIDEO OUT 2 connector.

Parts and Their Functions

The signals which can be switched using the menu items

are the TC, CTL, video, RF L/R and ENV L/R signals.

There is no INPUT CHECK function. The signals are

muted during line conversion.

@SD REF IN connectors and 75-ohm termination

switches

These are the SD reference video signal input

connectors. Input composite signal with color burst.

For termination, set the termination switch to ON.

AHD REF IN connectors and 75-ohm termination

switches

These are the HD reference video signal input

connectors. Input tri-level sync signals with both positive

and negative polarities.

For termination, set the termination switch to ON.

BHD REF OUT connector

This is the HD reference video signal output connector for

external synchronization. Tri-level sync signals with both

positive and negative polarities are output.

The output based on SYS FORMAT of menu item No.020

is delivered from the connector.

CSD REF OUT connector

The composite signal used for external synchronization

(black burst signal) is output from this connector.

DDIGITAL AUDIO IN and OUT connectors

These are the input and output connectors of the digital

audio signals that comply with the AES/EBU standards.

Remote control connectors

These connectors make it possible to use two of these

VTRs or to connect this VTR to an external controller so

that this VTR can be operated from an external

component.

Two remote control connectors are provided: one for

IN/OUT uses and the other for OUT uses only.

IN/OUT:For connection with an external controller

For connection during deck-to-deck operations

OUT: For connection during parallel run operations

For loop-through uses

ENCODER REMOTE connector

An external encoder remote controller is connected to

this connector when the video output signal settings are

to be adjusted from an external component.

RS-232C connector

PARALLEL REMOTE connector

This is used when the VTR is to be operated from an

external component.

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

B> D H

EF? @ A C G

PUSH PUSH

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

PUSH

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

PUSH PUSH

HD SDI input (audio, video)

SDTI input (when SDTI, an optional

accessory, has been installed)

SD SDI input (when SD up-converter,

an optional accessory, has been

installed)

SDTI output (when SDTI, an optional

accessory, has been installed)

SD SDI input ACTIVE THRU (when SD

up-converter, an optional accessory, has

been installed)

Audio monitor outputs

Analog audio inputs

Analog audio outputs

HD SDI output

(ACTIVE THRU)

SD SDI outputs

Digital audio inputs

Digital audio outputs

HD reference inputs

(loop-through output)

SD reference inputs

(loop-through output)

Video monitor output

(3 composite output lines)

Example of connections performed

for one VTR

Player side:

Set the REMOTE LED :on the front panel to the off

status (LOCAL mode).

Connections

HD SDI outputs

Example of connections performed

for two VTRs (deck-to-deck)

Source side:

Press the “9P” REMOTE button on the front panel

for 2 or more seconds to set the VTR to the

REMOTE status. (The 9P LED lights.)

Recorder side:

Set the REMOTE LED :on the front panel to the

off status (LOCAL mode).

SIGN

AC IN

IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

MON

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

PUSH PUSH

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

PUSH PUSH

SD reference signal generator

Source side

Recorder side

To audio monitor

cmponent

To video monitor

component

To audio monitor

component

To video monitor

component

HD SDI signal

Remote

signal (9P)

OFF

Note concerning tapes played back by this VTR

• Use tapes which have been shot by a variable frame rate

camera.

• Do not use tapes which are copies of shot tapes or edited tapes.

Doing so will cause the tape management information to be lost,

and normal conversion and playback may not be possible as a

result.

• To convert a tape, which was recorded at a frame rate other than

24fps (25fps), to 1080/24psf (1080/25psf), use a frame rate

converter (AJ-FRC27) which is available as an optional

accessory.

Connections

When this VTR plays back a tape which was recorded at a frame rate of 24

fps (25 fps) using a variable frame rate camera, the signals on the tape can

be output after converting them to 1080/24psf (1080/25psf) to enable direct

editing together with the AJ-HD3700 series.

Shown in the figure below is an example of the deck-to-deck connections.

Input the 48 Hz (or 50 Hz) reference signal to the HD REF input connector

as the REF input.

When this VTR plays back a tape which was recorded at a frame rate of 25

fps using a variable frame rate camera, the signals on the tape can be

output after converting them to 576/50i to enable direct editing together

with the SD VTRs.

Shown in the figure below is an example of the deck-to-deck connections.

Input the 50 Hz reference signal to the SD REF input connector as the REF

input.

Example of system connections in

23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode Example of system connections in

25 Hz (SD) mode

<Notes>

•

When the tape begins to travel at 1kspeed, the video may be

disturbed and the audio muted for several frames in order to

synchronize the REF input with the tape.

•

VITC signals are not output to the SD SDI and VIDEO OUT

connectors in the 23/24 Hz mode.

•

In the 25 (HD) Hz mode, the output video signals of the SD SDI

and VIDEO OUT connectors are delayed by approximately 1 field

in relation to the HD SDI output.

•

HD SDI output is muted in the 25 (SD) Hz mode.

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5

CUE L R

OUT

AC IN

SIGNAL

GND

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

OUTPUT

CH CH CH CH

INPUT

CH CH CH CH

REMOTE

75™

OFF

123

(SUPER)

OUT

HD SDISD SDIWFMVIDEO OUTREF IN

REF OUT DIGITAL AUDIO

OUT1

OUT2 OUT

OUT

MONITOR

(SUPER)

SPARE

ACTIVE

THROUGH

REMOTE

OUT REMOTE

IN/OUT

CONTROL

PANEL

V/A

CONTROL

RS-232C

RALLEL

IN/OUT

(50P)

75™

OFF

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO IN

MONITOR

TIME CODE

ACTIVE

THROUGH

1•2 3•4

5•6

3•4 5•6

7•8

1•2 7•8

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

PUSH PUSH

AJ-HD1700

(Source side)

HD SDI signal

Remote

signal (9P)

AJ-HD3700

(Recorder side)

Video monitor

75™

termination

OFF

75™termination ON

Reference signal

For 24 Hz mode:HD REF 48 Hz (interlace)

For 25 Hz (HD) mode:HD REF 50Hz (interlace)

HD SDI OUT

HD SDI

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PUSH PUSH

PUSH

AC IN

SIGNAL

GND

AES/EBU

SDI

SDTI

ANALOG

CH1/2

VIDEO

OUT

SERVICE ONLY

REMOTE IN/OUT

CH1 CH2AUDIO

ENCODER REMOTE

RS-232C

PARALLEL

REMOTE OUT

REF VIDEO

OFF

(WFM)

(SUPER)

OPTION

CH3/4

CH1/2

OUT

CH3/4

OUT

REMOTE

OFF

ANALOG

ACTIVE

THROUGH

OUT

MON

CH4

CH3

CH1 CH2AUDIO

OUT

CH4

CH3

OPTION

IN OUT

(SUPER)

SIGN

AC IN

IN IN L

OUT

CH 1

AUDIO IN

CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

VIDEO OUT

(WFM)

OFF

75≠

OFF

75≠

(SUPER)

SD REF IN

CH1·2

AUDIO

OUT

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

HD REF IN HD REF OUT

REF OUT

RS-232C

ENCODER

REMOTE

IN/OUT

REMOTE

OUT

PARALLEL

CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4

OUT R

CUE MON

CH1·2

AUDIO

CH3·4 CH5·6 CH7·8

ACTIVE

THROUGH

(SUPER)

ANALOG

DIGITAL AUDIO

SD SDI

(OPTION)

HD SDI

SDTI

OUT

OUT 1IN OUT 2 OUT 3

MONITOR (SUPER)

MONITOR

AUDIO OUT

PUSH PUSH PUSH PUSH

PUSH PUSH

Reference signal

SD REF 50 Hz (interlace)

75™

termina-

tion OFF

75™termination ON

REMOTE

IN/OUT

SD SDI

signal

SD SDI

Remote

signal (9P)

Video monitor

REMOTE

IN/OUT

SD SDI OUT

AJ-HD1700

(Source side) SD SDI signal

AJ-SD955A

(Recorder side)

Example of connections with an editing controller

Connections

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CTF

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

AV monitor

Av monitor

Source unit Source unit

Av monitor

Recorder

Video monitor signals

Audio monitor

signals

Audio monitor

signals

Audio monitor

signals

Video monitor

signals

Audio monitor

signals

Video monitor

signals

Remote signals

Video input signals

Video output signals

Audio input signals

Audio output signals

Reference signal

Editing controller AV switcher

Reference signal

generator

To REMOTE IN/OUT

connector

To REMOTE IN/OUT

connector

REMOTE

IN/OUT

<Note>

When disconnecting the remote signals (9P) from one component

and re-connecting them to another component, check the settings,

etc. of the editing controller.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

CH 1CH 5CH 2CH 6CH 3CH 7CH 4CH 8

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

L cassette size

XL cassette size

Consumer-use DV and DVCAM

cassettes

S cassettes

These tapes are exclusively designed for

consumer-use DV and DVCAM camera recorders.

They can be played using a cassette adapter

(optional accessory).

However, bear in mind that long-duration

cassette tapes (80 minutes in the standard

mode and 120 minutes in the LP mode) cannot

be used.

It is recommended that tapes bearing the

Panasonic brand be used as the consumer-use DV

tapes.

• Bear in mind that inserting a cassette tape

without the use of a cassette adapter will cause

malfunctioning.

M cassettes

DVCPRO HD LP:

Tapes capable of up to 32 minutes of recording and

playback

DVCPRO 25/50/50P/HD playback tapes

L cassettes

DVCPRO HD LP:

Tapes capable of up to 92 minutes of recording and

playback

DVCPRO 25/50/50P/HD playback tapes

For consumer-use DV or DVCAM applications:

These are playback tapes in the standard

consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassettes.

It is recommended that tapes bearing the

Panasonic brand be used as the consumer-use DV

tapes.

XL cassettes

DVCPRO HD LP:

Tapes capable of up to 126 minutes of recording

and playback

M cassette size

Concerning tapes

Align the cassette with the center of the insertion slot,

and push it in gently.

The cassette tape will be loaded automatically.

<Precautions when playing back consumer-use

DV and DVCAM tapes>

• It is not possible to play back consumer-use tapes

which have been recorded in the LP mode.

• The maximum transport speed of a consumer-use

DV or DVCAM cassette tape is 32k.

• The maximum still time for a consumer-use DV or

DVCAM cassette tape is 10 seconds.

• From the perspective of protecting consumer-use

DV and DVCAM cassette tapes, minimize the

number of times the tapes are cued up at the

same place as far as possible.

• When consumer-use DV and DVCAM cassette

tapes are used, the maximum time for STILL

TIMER is set to 10 seconds and the total time

elapsing when the VTR is left standing in the

STILL mode is set to 1 minute.

• When editing material which has been recorded

onto a consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette

tape, first record the material onto a DVCPRO HD

tape or another VTR used for broadcasting

applications.

• Noise may occur when performing slow playback

using consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette

tapes.

Before starting to operate the VTR, check whether the

equipment has been connected properly.

Turning on the power and inserting the cassette

1Turn on the VTR’s power.

3Insert the cassette tape.

Without forcing it, insert the cassette tape at the

prescribed position.

4Check that the STOP lamp is lighted.

When the tape is inserted, the cylinder starts

rotating automatically, the tape is loaded, and the

VTR is set to the STOP mode. The EJECT lamp

goes off.

2Check that the AUTO OFF lamp is off.

If condensation or some other problem has

occurred, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and no

further operations can be performed.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

1 23

STOP and STANDBY modes

1The VTR is set to the STOP mode when its STOP

button is pressed. The STOP lamp lights, and the

tape stops running.

•

In order to protect the tape, the VTR is set to

standby OFF after the time set by setup menu

item No.400 (STILL TIMER) has elapsed. If the

STOP, REW, FF or PLAY button is now

pressed, the VTR will be set to the

corresponding mode.

2The VTR is set to the STANDBY ON/OFF mode

when its STANDBY button is pressed. The

standby ON mode is established while the button’s

lamp is lighted. When the button is pressed in the

standby OFF mode, the VTR is set to the standby

ON mode.

When the button is pressed while the VTR is in the

STOP mode, it is set to the standby OFF mode

and the half-loading status, and the button’s lamp

goes off.

The cumulative total standby time at the same place

increases when programs are transmitted or the same

material is used repeatedly. In order to protect the

tape, keep the standby time at the same place on the

tape as short as possible by, for instance, selecting a

maximum of 30 seconds or so as the setup menu item

No.400 (STILL TIMER) setting.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Recording

1Set the accidental erasure prevention tab on the

cassette tape to the “recording” position, and insert

the tape.

3Select “EE” as the OUTPUT setting using on

the <HOME> menu. E-E pictures now appear on

the TV monitor.

4Check that the REC INHIBIT lamp is off.

If the lamp is lighted, select “OFF” as the R INH

setting using on the <HOME> menu.

If the inserted cassette has already been recorded

on using a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP, the

recording inhibited status (factory setting) will be

set by setup menu item No.118.

6Press the PLAY button while holding down the

REC button.

The REC and PLAY lamps light, and recording

starts.

7When the STOP button is pressed, the recording

ends, and the VTR is set to the stop mode.

<Notes>

•

During recording, check that the SERVO lamp is

lighted. The playback pictures will be disturbed if it

is blinking or off.

•

If analog signals (ANA1 to ANA4) have been

selected as the CH5 to CH8 input signals on the

AUDIO menu, their recording levels are tied in with

the recording levels which have been set for the

CH1 to CH4 signals.

•

When SDTI has been selected as the video signals

to be recorded, the audio signals which will be

recorded are also automatically set to SDTI.

5Select the video and audio input signals, and

adjust the audio levels.

Selecting the video and audio input signals

1Connect the signals to be recorded.

2Select the input signals using on the

<VIDEO> menu and to on the

<AUDIO> menu or <AUDIO SHIFT1> menu.

Adjust the audio levels

1Adjust the audio input levels of the CH1, CH2,

CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7, CH8 audio signals

and analog cue signal selected on the AUDIO

menu.

When the audio UNITY lamp on the front panel

is lighted, the audio signals will be recorded at

the appropriate levels.

2Before adjusting the recording level, check that

the REC LED is lighted and that the audio

adjustment dial is in the unlocked status (LOCK

LED off).

If the dial is in the LOCK status (LOCK LED

lighted), press it. The LOCK LED goes off, and

the lock is released.

In addition, the analog cue audio recording level

is adjusted using setup menu item No.790 (CUE

REC VOL) so that it will not exceed j20 dB.

F6F1

2Press the STOP button to set the VTR to the stop

mode.

Playback

1Insert the cassette tape, and set the VTR to the

STOP mode.

3Adjust the audio playback levels.

Before adjusting the playback levels, check that

the PB LED is lighted and that the audio

adjustment dial is in the unlocked status. If the dial

is locked (indicated by the lighted LOCK LED),

press it. The LOCK LED goes off, and the lock is

released. The analog cue audio level is adjusted

using setup menu item No.791 (CUE PB VOL).

Normally, the VTR is kept in the UNITY status (the

segment display of the control lights at the center).

4To end the playback, press the STOP button. The

VTR is now set to the STOP mode.

<Note>

During playback, check that the SERVO lamp is

lighted. The playback pictures will be disturbed if the

lamp is off or blinking.

2Press the PLAY button.

Normal playback commences.

Playback phase adjustment function

If two VTRs are to be used to play the same program,

the playback phase between the VTRs can be

adjusted by changing the playback speed of one of

the VTRs.

1Press the TRIM button (“i” or “j” button) while

holding down the PLAY button. Each time it is

pressed, the playback speed is accelerated or

decelerated in increments of the number of

playback framing fields selected by the setup menu

item No.109 (CAP.LOCK) setting.

The SERVO lamp remains off while the tape is

being played at the accelerated or decelerated

speed.

2Upon completion of the playback phase

adjustment, release the PLAY button.

The VTRs now return to the standard playback

speed, and the SERVO lamp lights.

Jog mode

Jog/Shuttle

1Press the JOG button.

Shuttle mode

1Press the SHTL button.

3To transfer the VTR from the jog mode to another

mode, press the button that corresponds to the

mode concerned.

2Turn the search dial.

The dial’s click-stops are released, and the tape is

played back at the speed corresponding to the

speed at which the dial is turned.

The maximum jog speed can be changed by

selecting the setup menu item No.310 (JOG FWD

MAX) and No.311 (JOG REV MAX) settings.

When the dial is no longer turned, a still picture will

appear.

2Turn the search dial.

The playback picture speed changes from 0 up to

w32kdepending on the dial position.

This speed can be switched to w9.8k, w16kor

w32kusing setup menu item No.101 (SHTL

MAX).

The dial has a click-stop at the center position

where a still picture will appear.

3To transfer the VTR from the shuttle mode to

another mode, press the STOP button or the

button of the mode concerned.

Variable mode

1Press the VAR button.

3To transfer the VTR from the variable mode to

another mode, press the STOP button or the

button of the mode concerned.

2Turn the search dial.

The playback picture speed changes from j4.9k

to i4.9kdepending on the dial position.

The maximum shuttle speed can be changed by

selecting the setup menu item No.308 (VAR FWD

MAX) and No.309 (VAR REV MAX) settings.

Noise will be generated at all speeds other than

j1kto i2k. (For all tapes other than DVCPRO

HD-LP recorded ones, the noise-free speed range

is j1.0kto i1.1k.)

<Note>

At the factory setting, the VTR is set to be transferred

to the shuttle mode, jog mode or variable mode when

the search dial is turned.

In cases where it is not convenient for the VTR to be

transferred directly to the variable speed mode, it can

be transferred via the search button. Select “KEY” as

the setup menu item No.100 (SEARCH ENA) setting.

Manual Editing

1Select the editing mode.

ASSEM button:

Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is

performed using this button.

INSERT button:

Insert editing is performed using this button.

2On the time code display, select the channels to be

edited.

ASSEM:

Set ASSEM to ON using the button.

INSERT:

To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels,

press the to buttons; to select A5, A6, A7,

A8 and TC channels, press the + to

+ buttons. The highlighted channels

will now be edited.

F6SHIFT

F2SHIFT

F6F1

3Press the PLAY button.

4While monitoring the TV monitor, search the

position where the editing is to be started (IN

point), and press the PLAY and EDIT buttons

together at this position.

5Similarly, while monitoring the TV monitor, search

the position where the editing is to be terminated

(OUT point), and press the PLAY or STOP button

at this position. The VTR is set to the PLAY or

STOP mode, and the editing is terminated.

Preroll

1Press the PREROLL button.

The VTR now performs the preroll operation.

When the cue time has been registered on the

HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen:

The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time

using the preroll time which was set using

(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.

When the search mode is established on the

CUE screen:

The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point

using the preroll time which was set using

(CU-ROL) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

The preroll operation is not performed when the

selected cue point has not been registered or when

the cue point registration mode is established.

In all other situations:

The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point

(or the current tape position when the IN point has

not been registered) using the preroll time which

was set using (PREROL) on the <HOME

SHIFT> menu.

If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN

point has not been registered, the current tape

position is automatically registered as the IN point

(but only when ENA has been selected as the

setup menu item No.305 (AUTO ENTRY) setting).

<Note>

The time code or CTL signal must be continuously

recorded between the edit IN point and preroll point.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Switch settings and adjustments

When using this VTR as the recorder

Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)

1Using the REMOTE button, set the player to

REMOTE and the recorder to LOCAL (ensure that

the REMOTE LED is not lighted).

2Select the editing mode (ASSEM or INSERT).

4Check and modify, if necessary, the edit points.

5Preview the material before editing it.

6Proceed with the editing.

7Review the edited results.

“Editing” refers to the work involved in using pre-

recorded tapes to bring different contents together or

delete unnecessary parts and bring together only the

necessary parts.

The basic editing steps are as follows.

Set the POWER

switch to ON.

Adjust the recording

levels.

Switch the time counter display to TC

or CTL.

Set the VTR to the LOCAL status (which is

indicated when the REMOTE LED is OFF).

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

When using this VTR as the player

Set the POWER

switch to ON.

Adjust the playback

levels.

Switch the time counter display to TC

or CTL.

Press the 9P button for 2 or more seconds

to set the VTR to the REMOTE status which

is indicated when the REMOTE LED is ON).

Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)

1Select the editing mode.

ASSEM button:

Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is

performed in this mode.

INSERT button:

Insert editing is performed in this mode.

2On the time code display, select the channels to be

edited.

ASSEM:

Set ASSEM to ON using the button.

INSERT:

To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels,

press the to buttons; to select A5, A6, A7,

A8 and TC channels, press the + to

+ buttons. The highlighted channels

will now be edited.

F6SHIFT

F2SHIFT

F6F1

3Press the PLAYER or RECORDER button to select

the VTR which is to be operated.

[Setting for editing using two VTRs]

PLAYER:

Press this button if the player VTR is to be

operated to register the edit points.

RECORDER:

Press this button if the recorder VTR (this VTR) is

to be operated to register the edit points.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

[ASSEM screen]

IN point OUT point

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

[INSERT screen]

IN point OUT point

AUDIO IN point

Marker

AUDIO OUT point

1Locate the edit IN point by performing the jog or

shuttle operation. Set the tape to the still picture

status at the desired position.

For a detailed description of the jog and shuttle

operations, refer to page 27.

2Press the IN button and SET button together.

The edit IN point is now registered.

The edit IN point value appears on the display.

4Press the OUT button and SET button together.

The edit OUT point is now registered.

The edit OUT point value appears on the display.

3Locate the edit OUT point by performing the jog or

shuttle operation. Set the tape to the still picture

status at the desired position.

Registering the edit pointsSelecting the editing mode

Match frame processing function

When two VTRs are used to perform the editing

operations, there will be a total of 4 edit points: the IN

and OUT points for the player and the IN and OUT points

for the recorder. However, the last point is automatically

calculated so only three of the edit points need to be

registered.

Negative duration function

Use setup menu items No.300 (IN/OUT DEL) and

No.301 (NEGA FLASH) in combination.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

1, 32, 4

The edit points can be registered directly using the

number keys.

1. Select the <ASSEMBLE> or <INSERT> menu.

2. Press the button to highlight the edit point. Turn

the ADJUST dial to move the highlighting to the IN

point or OUT point.

3. Press the button again, and input the desired edit

point directly using the number keys. Turn the

ADJUST dial to move from one digit to the next.

4. Press the button to register the point.

To abort the registration at any time, press the

button.

To reset a particular edit point (to 00:00:00:00), press

the button, align the highlighting with the edit

point concerned, and press the button again.

Next, press the button and button together.

Finally, press the button to register the point.

ENT

1Re-registering an edit point

Locate the new edit point by performing the jog or

shuttle operation, and press the IN (or OUT) button

and SET button at the same time to re-register the

edit point.

2Modifying an edit point in 1-frame increments

(trimming function)

Press the TRIM button while holding down the IN

(or OUT) button.

Each time the ibutton is pressed, the point is

moved ahead by one frame.

Conversely, each time the jbutton is pressed, the

point is moved back by one frame.

3Resetting edit points

1Resetting both an edit IN point and OUT

point

Press (TC CLR = RESET) on the <HOME>

menu.

(This takes effect only in the CTL mode.)

2Resetting either an edit IN point or OUT point

Press the button among the number keys

while holding down the IN (or OUT) button.

<Notes>

• An edit OUT point can be reset even while

editing is in progress.

• In the eject mode, the IN and OUT points are

automatically reset.

Modifying edit points

Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)

1Press the IN (or OUT) button to check the edit

point.

The value of the registered edit point appears on

the display.

2While holding down the IN (or OUT) button, press

the PREROLL button to check the picture at the

edit point.

The tape is cued up to the edit IN (or OUT) point,

and a still picture of the point appears.

•If “STOP” has been selected as the setup menu

item No.307 (AFTER CUE-UP) setting, the VTR

is set to the E-E mode provided that EE has

been selected as the <HOME> menu

(OUTPUT) setting.

3By holding down the IN and OUT buttons at the

same time, check the editing duration. The

duration appears on the display.

How the duration is calculated

• When two edit points have been set

The duration between the two points is

calculated.

• When only one edit point has been set

The duration between the data which has been

set and the current address is calculated.

• When no edit points have been set

The duration of the previously edited section is

calculated.

Checking the edit points

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

2 1, 3

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)

Previewing

1After the edit points have been registered, press

the PREVIEW button.

Regular preview is now conducted.

<Notes>

• If the edit IN point has not been registered, the

position where the PREVIEW button was

pressed is registered as the edit IN point.

• To stop the preview at any time, press the

STOP button.

• When the PREVIEW button is pressed again

after the IN point during the course of a preview,

the preview will start again from the beginning.

• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is

postrolled, after which it stops automatically.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

1Press the AUTO EDIT button.

Automatic editing is now executed.

• To suspend editing at any time, press the STOP

button.

• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is

postrolled, after which it stops.

Postrolling

In the case of assemble editing, editing continues

for about 2 seconds after the edit OUT point is

passed, and the tape is then returned to the OUT

point, after which it stops.

In the case of insert editing, the PLAY mode is

established after the edit OUT point has been

passed, and the tape is then returned to the OUT

point, after which it stops.

Retry function

Even when the STOP button has been pressed to

suspend editing, editing can be repeated from the

beginning simply by pressing the AUTO EDIT

button again.

Auto tag function

If, upon completion of editing, when the AUTO

EDIT button is pressed although the next edit point

has not yet been registered, the previous edit OUT

point is registered as the IN point, and editing is

executed.

To release the auto tag mode, press one of the

transport system buttons (such as the PLAY

button).

<Note>

The registered points are automatically cleared

after editing has been executed. However, the

previous edit points can be recalled by pressing

the TRIMi(or TRIMj) button and SET button at

the same time.

Automatic editing

1Upon completion of the editing, press the REVIEW

button.

Review is now started by the recorder.

• To stop the review at any time, press the STOP

button.

• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is

postrolled, after which it stops.

Reviewing

Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

∫Modifying the edit points

Video IN point:

While holding down the IN button, press the TRIMi

button or TRIMjbutton.

Video OUT point:

While holding down the OUT button, press the

TRIMibutton or TRIMjbutton.

Audio IN point:

While holding down the A-IN button, press the

TRIMibutton or TRIMjbutton.

Audio OUT point:

While holding down the A-OUT button, press the

TRIMibutton or TRIMjbutton.

∫Cueing the tape up to the edit points

Cue-up to video IN point:

While holding down the IN button, press the

PREROLL button.

Cue-up to video OUT point:

While holding down the OUT button, press the

PREROLL button.

Cue-up to audio IN point:

While holding down the A-IN button, press the

PREROLL button.

Cue-up to audio OUT point:

While holding down the A-OUT button, press the

PREROLL button.

The video edit points and audio edit points can be

registered independently, and editing can be executed

with the video points offset from the audio points.

Audio edit points cannot be registered when the

assemble editing mode has been selected.

After registering the edit points, proceed with the

same operations as for insert editing.

∫Registering the edit points

Video IN point:

While holding down the IN button, press the SET

button.

Video OUT point:

While holding down the OUT button, press the SET

button.

Audio IN point:

While holding down the A-IN button, press the SET

button.

Audio OUT point:

While holding down the A-OUT button, press the

SET button.

<Note>

If the editing mode is changed to assemble editing

after the audio edit points have been registered, the

audio edit points will be cleared.

∫Clearing the edit points

Video IN point:

While holding down the IN button, press the

button among the number keys.

Video OUT point:

While holding down the OUT button, press the

button among the number keys.

Audio IN point:

While holding down the A-IN button, press the

button among the number keys.

Audio OUT point:

While holding down the A-OUT button, press the

button among the number keys.

Audio Split Editing

A-IN button A-OUT button

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Audio Split Editing

∫Duration display

The duration can be indicated on the display.

Between the video IN and OUT points:

Press the IN button and OUT button at the same

time.

Between the audio IN and OUT points:

Press the A-IN button and A-OUT button at the

same time.

Match frame processing function

When two VTRs are used to perform the audio split

editing operations, there will be a total of 8 edit

points: the video IN and OUT points for the player,

the video IN and OUT points for the recorder, the

audio IN and OUT points for the player, and the

audio IN and OUT points for the recorder.

When five of the eight edit points are registered, the

remaining three points are automatically calculated

so only five of the edit points can be registered.

∫When a VTR not equipped with the split

editing function is used as the player

When a VTR for which the video and audio edit

points cannot be set independently is used as the

player, split editing is still possible by setting the

audio IN point and OUT point in the recorder and

setting the data of three points as the video edit

points.

<Note>

If, during audio split editing, the video OUT point (or

audio OUT point) only is registered without the

audio OUT (or video OUT point) having been

registered and automatic editing is then executed,

editing will continue until either the audio OUT point

(or video OUT point) is registered or the STOP

button is pressed to suspend the editing operation.

Variable memory function

1Register the IN point using the SET button and IN

button. There is no need to set the OUT point for

variable memory playback.

Variable memory playback operation procedure

The variable memory mode can be selected by setting

(VARMEM) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu to

“ON.”

When (VARMEM) is set to “OFF,” the variable

memory mode is canceled, and the regular mode is

established.

<Note>

Bear in mind that when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu

item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, (VARMEM)

will no longer appear on the display and the variable

memory mode cannot be selected.

2Set the initial speed (j1.0kto i2.0k) using the

search dial while holding down the SET button.

3When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW

button are pressed at the same time, the tape is

automatically prerolled and played back at the

initial speed setting up to the IN point.

4After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the

search dial to store the playback speed in the

memory.

5Press the STOP button to stop the tape.

6When the PREVIEW/REVIEW button is pressed,

variable memory playback is performed at the

memorized speed.

Variable memory function selection

This VTR is provided with two variable memory

functions, as follows. These functions can be used in

the variable memory mode.

Variable memory playback:

Any section of the tape can be played back at variable

speeds in the VAR mode, the changes in the speed

can be stored in the memory, and the tape can be

played back at the memorized speed.

Variable memory editing:

Using the VTR as a controller (recorder in the deck-to-

deck mode) to control the playback speed of the

player, editing can be performed in the variable speed

mode.

Outline To perform variable memory playback operations, set

the VTR to the variable memory mode, and take the

steps below.

<Notes>

• After passing the IN point, the tape is played back

in accordance with the settings in the memory, and

it continues to run at the last speed stored in the

memory until the STOP button is pressed.

• Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared

when the VTR exits the variable memory mode. It

is also cleared when the POWER switch is set to

“OFF.”

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

156 4

1Select the editing mode on the <ASSEMBLE> or

<INSERT> menu.

2Select the VTR to be operated by pressing the

RECORDER or PLAYER button.

3Register the IN and OUT points using the SET

button and IN and OUT buttons. The player’s OUT

point cannot be registered.

4Press the PLAYER button to select the player

VTR, and then set the initial speed using the

search dial while holding down the SET button.

5When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW

button are pressed at the same time, the tapes in

both the player and recorder are automatically

prerolled, and the player VTR plays back the tape

at the initial speed setting up to the IN point.

6After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the

search dial to store the playback speed of the

player VTR in the memory.

7When the tape passes the OUT point that was set

by the recorder, the storing of the playback speed

in the memory ends.

8When the AUTO EDIT button is pressed, variable

memory editing is executed. Once editing has

been executed, the memorized speeds will be

cleared except for the initial speed which is not

cleared.

9By pressing the PREVIEW/REVIEW button, the

edited results can be checked.

Variable memory editing operation procedure

To perform variable memory editing operations, set

this VTR, which is connected as the recorder to the

variable memory mode, and take the steps below.

Variable memory function

<Notes>

• Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared

when the VTR exits the variable memory mode. It

is also cleared when the POWER switch is set to

“OFF.”

• Phase synchronization is not performed during

playback up to the IN point of the variable memory

editing. Therefore, depending on the VTR used as

the player and its speed setting, no guarantees are

made for the accuracy of the IN point.

• When conducting variable memory editing in the

speed range of j1.0kto i2.0k, use VTRs with

which these speeds are guaranteed for both the

recorder and player.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

946

Function menus

The function menus are used to set the functions which are frequently used.

The function menus are selected directly using the direct menu buttons on the front panel.

General description

General menus

The most basic settings for recording, playback and

TC operations are set on these menu screens.

The basic input/output settings for the video signals

are performed and, moreover, the level of the HD

output signals can also be adjusted on these menu

screens.

The basic input/output settings for the audio signals

are performed on these menu screens.

The TC-related settings are performed on these menu

screens.

The settings for superimposing time codes on the

display can also be performed on these menu

screens.

Up to 24 frequently used menu items which have

been registered can be used on these menu screens.

A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these

menu screens. In the PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6

cue points on each page are provided so that the cue

points can be managed on a page-by-page basis.

The warnings and hour-meter can be checked on

these menu screens. On the SHIFT menu screen,

error log files can be checked, deleted or saved onto

or loaded from IC cards.

These enable movement to the screens for operations

(adjustments, saving data onto or loading it from the

internal memory or IC cards) relating to the SYSTEM

and SETUP menus.

The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this

menu screen.

The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are

selected on this menu screen.

Special menus

<<SYSTEM MENU>>

The SYSTEM menu is displayed on-screen, enabling

various adjustments to be made.

<<SETUP MENU>>

The SETUP menu is displayed on-screen, enabling

various adjustments to be made.

<<FILE>>

The current setting information, including the SETUP

menu contents, can be provided with titles and either

saved in or loaded from the backup memory in one of

4 variations.

<<PF1 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF1 BK ASSIGN>>

<<PF2 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF2 BK ASSIGN>>

The SETUP menu items which can be registered are

displayed on-screen, and they can be registered into

or deleted from the function buttons.

<<IC CARD MENU>>

The current setting information, including the SETUP

menu contents, can be provided with titles and saved

onto or loaded from the IC card memory in one of 8

variations.

<<IC CARD/ERR LOG>>

The contents of the error logs can be provided with

titles and saved onto or loaded from the IC card

memory in one of 8 variations.

<<IC CARD/MULTI CUE>>

The MULTI CUE menu items can be provided with

titles and saved onto or loaded from the IC card

memory in one of 8 variations.

<<50P IN ASSIGN>>, <<50P OUT ASSIGN>>

Using the front panel controls and on-screen menus,

the functions are registered into the input pins of the

parallel remote (50PIN) connector and the statuses

are registered into its output pins.

Function menus

Allocating the function keys

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Menu (6 types) Menu hierarchy Items allocated to function keys

HOME 1st OUTPUT TC/CTL TC CLR R INH

2nd (SHIFT) PREROL OUTREF CAPSTN VARMEM

VIDEO 1st VID IN INT SG WFM UP CON DW CON

2nd (SHIFT)

3rd (F+SHIFT)

V LV C LV HUE SUP LV

BR CT R-BR B-BR R-CT B-CT

AUDIO

1st A1 IN A2 IN DIN 12 A3 IN A4 IN DIN 34

2nd (SHIFT) A5 IN A6 IN DIN 56 A7 IN A8 IN DIN 78

3rd (SHIFT) VOLUME RECCUE M MIX

TC 1st TC SRC TCG MD TCG RG RUN MD DF MOD

2nd (SHIFT) SUPER C HPOS C VPOS DISPLY C TYPE TIMER

PF1 1st F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

2nd (SHIFT) F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

PF2 1st F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

2nd (SHIFT) F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

CUE

MULTICUE function

1st PREV NEXT MODE CLR AL CLR

2nd (SHIFT) CARD PAGE ROTATE CU-ROL

DIAG

ERROR LOG function

1st WARN HOURS

2nd (SHIFT) STEP CARD AL CLR

MENU 1st FILE CARD SYSTEM SETUP

2nd (SHIFT) PF1 FT PF1 BK PF2 FT PF2 BK 50P IN 50P OT

ASSEM ASSEM

SYSTEM

SYSTEM MENU (ON SCREEN)

CANCEL RESET SET EXIT

SETUP

SETUP MENU (ON SCREEN)

: PREV ;NEXT CANCEL RESET SET EXIT

FILE

USER FILE BACKUP function

P.LOAD LOAD <SAVE >LOCK EXIT

PF1, PF2

MENU ASSIGN function : PREV ; NEXT CANCEL RESET SET EXIT

CARD

IC CARD function (MENU)

IC CARD function (ERRLOG)

IC CARD function (MULTI CUE)

FORMAT SAVE <LOAD >DELETE LOCK EXIT

50PIN

50-pin ASSIGN function :PREV ;NEXT CANCEL RESET SET EXIT

INSERT A5 A6 A7 A8 TC

V A1A2A3A4CUE

No factory settings (any items can be allocated to any keys).

Warning mark

When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning mark (W) blinks. If the DIAG button is then pressed, the corresponding warning message is

displayed on the screen. ( See DIAG screen.)

GENERAL

DESCRIPTION

Function menus

Toggle:

Each time a function button is pressed, the setting is

changed or entered.

F itoggle*:

When a function button is pressed while the F button

is held down, the setting can be changed or entered

each time.

Toggle iADJ:

When a function button is pressed, the setting is

highlighted, and the status in which the setting can be

changed is established.

The ADJUST dial is used to change the setting.

When the same function button is pressed again and

the highlighting is released, the setting is entered.

Press:

When a function button is pressed, the setting can be

changed while the button is held down or at the

instant when it is pressed. When the function button

is released, the original setting is restored.

F ipress*:

When a function button is pressed while the F button

is held down, the setting can be changed while the

button is held down or at the instant when it is

pressed. When the function button is released, the

original setting is restored.

* When only the function button is pressed, message

display “Press i” etc. blinks.

F5F

How to switch the settings

Function menus

<HOME>

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Status display 1

Status display 2

Warning mark

Name of menu displayed

Remaining tape/total tape

Time counter

Cue time

Back menu indicator

Variable memory mode indicator

Operation mode/speed

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

The most basic settings for recording, playback and

TC operations are set on this menu screen.

VTR

PB FMT Playback format

This displays the format used

for playback.

1080i LP

720p LP

1080i SP

720p SP

422

420p

411

DVCAM

Description of settings

These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback

mode.

REC FMT*1Recording format

This displays the format used

for recording.

1080i

720p

The tape is recorded using the 1080i format.

The tape is recorded using the 720p format.

TM INFO*2Tape management

information

This displays the frame rate

(shooting speed) information

which is recorded on a tape

shot by a variable frame rate

camera. INVALID The tape management information is invalid.

<Note>

In some cases, the tape management information may be erroneously

overwritten by insert editing or tape dubbing, and it may not be possible to

perform editing properly.

- - - A cassette tape has not been inserted.

24P

24PA

25P

These settings indicate the recorded frame rate.

These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-SP playback mode.

These settings indicate the DVCPRO (50 Mbps format) playback mode.

These settings indicate the DVCPRO (25 Mbps format), DV and DVCAM

playback modes.

Status display 1

*1: This status is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*2: This status is not displayed when the 59/60 Hz or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

HOW TO SWITCH

THE SETTINGS

SYSTEM

23/24

25 (SD)

23/24 The 23/24 Hz mode is selected.

25 (HD) The 25 (HD) Hz mode is selected.

The 25 (SD) Hz mode is selected.

System frequency display during 24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD and SD)

modes

When 24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected

for the system menu item No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), the selected

system frequency contents are displayed for the F1 function button,

making it possible to check the currently selected system frequency

mode.

VTR Description of settings

Status display 1 (continued)

REF Output reference

This displays the output

reference status.

HD25

HD50

The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame

frequency is 25 Hz.

HD23 The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame

frequency is 23.98 Hz.

The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 50 Hz.

HD59 The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 59.94 Hz.

HD60 The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 60 Hz.

IN50 The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 50 Hz.

HD24 The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame

frequency is 24 Hz.

IN59 The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 59.94 Hz.

IN60 The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 60 Hz.

INT23

The signal (23.98 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

INT25

The signal (25 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

INT50

The signal (50 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

INT59

The signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

INT60

The signal (60 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

NTSC59 The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 59.94 Hz.

PAL50 The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field

frequency is 50 Hz.

INT59N The SD REF signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting. Since the

SD REF signal is not input, the signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal

generator is selected as the reference.

INT50P The SD REF input signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting.

Since the SD REF signal is not input, the signal (50 Hz) from the internal

generator is selected as the reference.

INT24

The signal (24 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.

Function menus

<HOME>

Playback reference signal (OutRef) specifications for tape playback

Input signal provided (“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)

HD_REF_IN

Yes

SD_REF_IN

Yes

INPUT

Yes

AUTO EXT_HD_REF EXT_SD_REF INPUT

HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN SD_REF_IN INPUT

HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN SD_REF_IN Internal HD

HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN Internal SD INPUT

HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN Internal SD Internal HD

SD_REF_IN Internal HD SD_REF_IN INPUT

SD_REF_IN Internal HD SD_REF_IN Internal HD

INPUT Internal HD Internal SD INPUT

Internal HD Internal HD Internal SD Internal HD

OUTREF setting (menu 031)

Internal HD: HD playback reference, 74MHzCLK operates at FreeRun setting.

Internal SD: SD playback reference, 4fscCLK operates at FreeRun setting.

HOME

59.94 Hz/60 Hz operation specifications for tape playback

Input signal provided (“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)

HD_REF_IN

Yes

SD_REF_IN

Yes

INPUT

Yes

AUTO EXT_HD_REF EXT_SD_REF INPUT

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency. 59.94Hz Complies with INPUT

frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

59.94Hz

Complies with INPUT

frequency.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with HD

REF IN frequency.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

59.94Hz

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with INPUT

frequency.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with INPUT

frequency.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

Complies with INPUT

frequency.

Complies with Menu

030 setting.

OUTREF setting (menu 031)

Menu 030: HD FREQUENCY 59.94/60 selection

<Note>

Operation cannot be performed in the 60 Hz mode during SD tape playback.

Input signal provided

(“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)

HD_REF_IN

Yes

HD_REF_IN

Internal HD

23.98/24Hz, 25 Hz (HD) mode

Input signal provided (“Yes”)/

not provided (“No”) OUT REF setting (Menu 031)

HD_REF_IN

Yes

SD_REF_IN

Yes

AUTO

HD_REF_IN

SD_REF_IN

Internal HD

HD_REF

HD_REF_IN

Internal HD

SD_REF

SD_REF_IN

Internal SD

SD_REF_IN

Internal SD

25 Hz (SD) mode

59.94 Hz/60 Hz, 50 Hz mode

Function menus

<HOME>

Operation mode (speed) display

This indicates the current operation mode (including

the speed display).

Display

EJECT

Operation mode

Eject mode

STANDBY OFF Standby OFF mode

T.RELEASE Tension release mode

STOP Stop mode

PREROLL Preroll mode

PLAY Playback mode

PLAY iSpecial playback (playback phase

adjustment) mode (FWD direction)

PLAY jSpecial playback (playback phase

adjustment) mode (REV direction)

REC Recording mode

JOG

REV/STILL/FWD Jog mode

VAR (speed)

[j4.9 to i4.9] Variable mode

SHTL (speed)

[j32.0 to i32.0]Shuttle mode

FF Fast forwarding mode

REW Rewinding mode

EDIT Editing mode

AUTO EDIT Automatic editing mode

PREVIEW Preview mode

When function F6 (VARMEM) on <HOME SHIFT> is “ON”

DSPD (speed)

[j1.0 to i2.0]Initial speed setting of variable memory

DSMP (speed)

[j1.0 to i2.0]Playback speed memory mode of variable

memory

DPLY (speed)

[j1.0 to i2.0]Playback mode of variable memory

DPRV (speed)

[j1.0 to i2.0]Preview mode of variable memory editing

DEDT (speed)

[j1.0 to i2.0]

Execution mode of variable memory editing

REVIEW Review mode

Indicator

SCH This lights when the SCH phase of the SDREF

signal is within the prescribed range.

Description of setting

CF This lights when color framing is locked.

DF This lights during recording or playback in the

drop frame mode.

<Note>

If the time code data could not be read properly

(“T¢R” is displayed), the display of the previous

status is held.

Remaining tape/total tape display

The lengths of the remaining tape and total tape of the

inserted cassette are displayed in increments of minutes.

REM 10/ 92

Cue time display

This displays the currently registered cue time. (For

details on the cue time operation, refer to “Cue point

registration, preroll and cue-up.”)

Cue time operations can be performed on the HOME

screen only.

Status display 2

<Note>

Slight errors may occur. The remaining tape value

blinks when less than 3 minutes of the tape remain.

(10 minutes remaining on a 92-minute tape)

Example:

Total tape

Remaining tape

Time counter displays

Display

CTL

Description

CTL counter data

TCG Time code data of time code generator

UBG User’s bit data of time code generator

tcg When the time code data of time code

generator is preset

ubg When the user’s bit data of time code

generator is preset

TCR/T¢RTime code data of time code reader

UBR/U¢RUser’s bit data of time code reader

If the time code data or user’s bit data could not be

read out properly, “T¢R” or “U¢R” is displayed. If the

CTL signal is present, the time code data is

supplemented by CTL.

Field mark

[1st field: “ ”/2nd field: “.”]

(This does not appear when the i0.3kor

j0.3kspeed is exceeded.)

Drop frame mark (59/60 Hz mode only)

[Non-drop frame mode: “:”/drop frame

mode: “.”]

Variable memory mode indicator

This is displayed when the (VARMEM) function

button on <HOME SHIFT> is set to “ON.” While

is lighted, variable memory operations can be

performed at any time.

(For details, refer to “Variable memory function.”)

TCR 00:00:00:00.

<HOME>

Registering TCG values

Selecting the values

Press the TC/CTL button to select TC.

Press the button. The selected item (cue time

or TC) is now highlighted.

Turn the ADJUST dial to select TC.

Again press the button. A single digit is

highlighted, and the mode for inputting numerical

values is established.

<Notes>

• The UBG value and cue time can be registered

in the same way. The CTL value cannot be

registered.

• TC or UB can be registered only when the

internal time code generator has been selected.

Inputting numbers and letters

Press the to number keys to input

numerical values.

Use the + buttons to input A, B and C, and

the + buttons to input D, E and F.

To move the input digit, turn the ADJUST dial.

To input a minus sign, press the and ]

buttons when the left-most digit is highlighted.

To input a plus sign, press the and ]

buttons when the left-most digit is highlighted or

press the button.

(The display goes blank.)

To clear all the digits to zero, press the and

buttons.

<Notes>

• When the button is tapped while the

button is held down, the display changes in the

following sequence: A >B >C >A >B and

so on. The same applies when D, E and F are

input using and .

• If, when “REV” has been selected as the setup

menu item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the

button is released while a letter is being input,

the displayed character will be entered.

• Letters can be input only while a UBG value is

being registered.

• The input of a minus number is possible only

while the cue time is being registered after

“d12h” is selected as the setup menu No.002

(TAPE TIMER) setting and CTL is selected by

the TC/CTL button.

• If “REV” has been selected as the setup menu

item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input

starts from the highest order digit (the display

appears from the far right). However, turning

the ADJUST dial once will restore the NORMAL

input mode.

TRIMi

TRIMj

Entering the input values

Press the button. The value input is

registered, and the normal display is restored.

<Notes>

• To cancel the registration, press the button.

• If the input value is outside the registration

enable range, the alarm blinks, and

the value cannot be registered until it has been

corrected.

INVALID

ENT

Function menus HOME

Function menus

<HOME>

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

OUTPUT Toggle No. 140

OUTPUT

Description of setting

For selecting the output signals.

TAPE: In the STOP mode, the signals played back from the

tape are output.

During recording or editing (*), simultaneous playback

signals are output.

*: Setup menu item No.302 (CONFI EDIT) must be set.

EE:The input signals selected by the setup menu items

No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL) to

No.724 (D IN SEL 78) settings are output.

Setting

TAPE

TC/CTL*2

Toggle ___ For selecting the time counter display.

TC:The time code value is displayed.

UB: The user’s bit value is displayed.

CTL: The control signal (time data) is displayed.

CTL

R INH F itoggle No. 113

REC INH

Refer to the setup menu.

<Note>

The setting can be changed from OFF to ALL simply by

operating the function button without pressing the F button.

OFF

ALL

PRE

NORM

V/CTL

F4 (SHIFT)

CAPSTN F itoggle No. 109

CAP. LOCK

Refer to the setup menu.2F

F3 (SHIFT)

OUTREF F itoggle No. 031

OUT REF

Refer to the setup menu.AUTO

INPUT

HD_REF

SD_REF

F1 (SHIFT)

PREROL Toggle i

ADJ

No. 000

P-ROLL TIME

Refer to the setup menu.0s --- 5s ---

30s

F6 (SHIFT)

VARMEM*1

Toggle ___ For selecting the variable memory mode.

OFF:The variable memory mode is not used.

ON: The status is established in which variable memory

playback or variable memory editing is enabled.

OFF

TC CLR*1

Press ___ For resetting the time counter display.

If the F4 button is pressed while the control signal (time

data) is displayed on the time counter, it is reset to zero.

RESET

___ ___ ___ ______

F2 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F5 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM

FREQ) setting.

*2: CTL cannot be selected when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM

FREQ) setting. TC is selected when the power is turned on.

Function menus

<VIDEO>

1. Video signal input switching, internal signal

source type changing, and up-converter aspect

ratio conversion

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

VID IN Toggle No. 600

VIDEO IN SEL

Description of setting

Refer to the setup menu.

The SD SDI and SDTI settings will not appear if the optional

boards have not been installed.

Setting

INT SG

HDSDI

SDTI

SDSDI

UP CON Toggle No. 621

UPCONV MODE

Refer to the setup menu.FIT_V

FIT_H

FIT_HV

INT SG Toggle No. 601

VIDEO INT SG

Refer to the setup menu.100%CB

75%CB

SMPTE

ARIB

RAMP

BLACK

PLL

DW CON Toggle No. 620

DOWNCON MODE

Refer to the setup menu.FIT_V

FIT_H

FIT_HV

14:9

13:9

WFM Toggle No. 00

WFM SEL

Refer to the setup menu.CTL

VIDEO

RF L

RF R

ENV L

ENV R

___ ___ ___ ______

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Time counter

The basic input/output settings for the video signals

are set, and the level of the HD output signals can

also be adjusted on these menu screens.

VIDEO

2. Video signal output level adjustments

LCD monitor brightness and color adjustments

This display appears when the + buttons are

pressed. Refer to setup menu items No.670 to 675.

SHIFTF

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Function menus

<VIDEO>

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item Description of settingSetting

F3 (SHIFT)

Y HD Toggle i

ADJ

No. 653

Y LVL(HD)

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F iPress.

0.0% ---

100.0% ---

141.3%

F4 (SHIFT)

Pb HD Toggle i

ADJ

No. 654

Pb LVL(HD)

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F iPress.

0.0% ---

100.0% ---

141.3%

F5 (SHIFT)

Pr HD Toggle i

ADJ

No. 655

Pr LVL(HD)

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F iPress.

0.0% ---

100.0% ---

141.3%

F6 (SHIFT)

BK HD Toggle i

ADJ

No. 656

BK LVL(HD)

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use F iPress.

j10.0% ---

0.0% ---

i10.0%

When “CMPNT” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting

When “CMPST” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting

F1 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F2 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F1 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F2 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F3 (SHIFT)

V LV Toggle i

ADJ

No. 662

V LEVEL

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F iPress.

0.0% ---

100.0% ---

200.0%

F4 (SHIFT)

C LV Toggle i

ADJ

No. 663

C LEVEL

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F iPress.

0.0% ---

100.0% ---

141.3%

F5 (SHIFT)

HUE Toggle i

ADJ

No. 664

HUE

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (0.0) level, use F iPress.

j31.0 ---

0.0 ---

i31.0

F6 (SHIFT)

SUP LV Toggle i

ADJ

No. 665

SETUP LVL

Refer to the setup menu.

To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use F iPress.

j10.0% ---

0.0% ---

i10.0%

Function menus

<AUDIO>

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

The basic input/output settings for the audio signals

are set on these menu screens.

1. Audio signal input selection (CH1jCH4)

2. Audio signal input selection (CH5-CH8)

3. Audio volume control switching, CUE audio

recording signal selection, and audio monitor

mix switching

Function

button/item Setting Corresponding setup

menu item

A1 IN Toggle No. 713

CH1 IN SEL

Description of setting

Refer to the setup menu.

Setting

INT SG

DIGI

ANA

A2 IN Toggle No. 714

CH2 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA

A3 IN Toggle No. 715

CH3 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA

A4 IN Toggle No. 716

CH4 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA

DIN 12 Toggle No. 721

D IN SEL 12

Refer to the setup menu.AES

SDI

DIN 34 Toggle No. 722

D IN SEL 34

Refer to the setup menu.AES

SDI

F1 (SHIFT1)

A5 IN Toggle No. 717

CH5 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA1

F2 (SHIFT1)

A6 IN Toggle No. 718

CH6 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA2

F3 (SHIFT1)

DIN 56 Toggle No. 723

D IN SEL 56

Refer to the setup menu.AES

SDI

F4 (SHIFT1)

A7 IN Toggle No. 719

CH7 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA3

F5 (SHIFT1)

A8 IN Toggle No. 720

CH8 IN SEL

Refer to the setup menu.INT SG

DIGI

ANA4

F6 (SHIFT1)

DIN 78 Toggle No. 724

D IN SEL 78

Refer to the setup menu.AES

SDI

AUDIO

Function menus

<AUDIO>

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item Description of settingSetting

F3 (SHIFT2)

RECCUE Toggle No. 733

REC CUE

Refer to the setup menu.CUE

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

CH1i2

CH3i4

CH5i6

CH7i8

CH1j8

F1 (SHIFT2)

VOLUME Toggle No. 141

VOLUME

Refer to the setup menu.

For switching what is to be controlled by the audio volume

controls. (The levels of all the CH1jCH8 channels are controlled.)

REC

AUTO

F5 (SHIFT2)

___ ___ ___ ______

F4 (SHIFT2)

___ ___ ___ ______

F2 (SHIFT2)

___ ___ ___ ______

F6 (SHIFT2)

M MIX Toggle No. 737

MONI MIX

Refer to the setup menu.OFF

L/R

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

d12h

24h

Function menus

<TC>

The TC-related settings are performed on these menu

screens.Whether the TC is to be superimposed onto

the display can also be set on this screen.

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

TC SRC Toggle No. 507

TC SOURCE

Description of setting

Refer to the setup menu.

Setting

When HD SDI, INT SG or SDTI is selected:

INT

EXT_L

SLTC

SVITC

When SD SDI is selected:

INT

EXT_L

VITC

RUN MD Toggle No. 504

RUN MODE

Refer to the setup menu.REC

FREE

DF MOD F itoggle No. 511

DF MODE

Refer to the setup menu.DF

NDF

F1 (SHIFT)

SUPER Toggle No. 005

SUPER

Refer to the setup menu.OFF

F2 (SHIFT)

C HPOS Toggle i

ADJ

No. 007

CHARA H-POS

Refer to the setup menu.0 --- 6 --- 37

F3 (SHIFT)

C VPOS Toggle i

ADJ

No. 008

CHARA V-POS

Refer to the setup menu.0 --- 23 --- 32

F5 (SHIFT)

C TYPE Toggle No. 009

CHARA TYPE

Refer to the setup menu.WHITE

W/OUT

F6 (SHIFT)

TIMER Toggle No. 002

TAPE TIMER

Refer to the setup menu.

TCG MD Toggle No. 503

TCG MODE

Refer to the setup menu.REGEN

PRE

AUTO

TCG RG Toggle No. 505

TCG REGEN

Refer to the setup menu.TC&UB

F4 (SHIFT)

DISPLY Toggle No. 006

DISPLAY SEL

Refer to the setup menu.TIME

T&STA

T&S&M

T&RT

T&YMD

T&MDY

T&DMY

___ ___ ___ ______

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Function menus

<CUE>

Moving to registered points

The highlighting on the registered point display area is

moved by turning the ADJUST dial. It is moved in the

ascending order of points when the dial is turned

clockwise and in the descending order of points when

it is turned counterclockwise. When “AUTO” has

been selected as the (PAGE) setting on the

<CUE SHIFT> menu, the highlighting can be moved

also to the previous or next page.

• Depending on the setting selected for

(ROTATE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the

following applies to moving the highlighting in the

ascending order of points.

When “OFF” is set:

The highlighting cannot be moved from page 9 to

page 0.

When “ON” is set:

The highlighting can be moved from page 9 to page 0.

•

In moving in the descending order of points, the

highlighting cannot be moved from page 0 to page 9.

Search point and registered point

operations

Each time the (MODE) button of the <CUE>

menu is pressed, the search mode and cue point

registration mode are switched alternately. Perform

the search point or registered point operations in the

respective mode.

• When the power is turned on, the search point or

registered point, whichever was established when

the power was last turned off, is established.

• When the setting for (PAGE) or (ROTATE)

on the <CUE SHIFT> menu has been changed,

“01” (page 0/point no.1) is set for both the search

and registered points.

Cue point registration mode

It is possible to register points to which the tape is to

be prerolled. When the display page has been

changed using the (PREV) or (NEXT) button

on the <CUE> menu, the following applies depending

on the setting for (PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT>

menu.

When “MANU” is set:

Both the search and registered points move to the top

of the changed page.

When “AUTO” is set:

Only the registered point moves to the top of the

changed page; the search point does not move.

F2F1

F4F3

A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these menu

screens. When “AUTO” has been selected as the

(PAGE) setting on the AUTO PAGE mode <CUE SHIFT>

menu, up to 10 pages of cue points with 6 cue points on

each page can be managed on a page-by-page basis.

The 60 cue points are indicated using the page number

display and registered point display areas.

<Note>

Cue points cannot be registered, prerolled, etc. if a

setting other than “ENA” has been selected as the setup

menu item No.001 (LOCAL ENA) setting in the REMOTE

mode.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Page number display area

Registered point display area

Cue point data display areas

Page number display area

The page number from 0 to 9 is indicated here.

Registered point display area

On each page, six cue point data managed by

registered point numbers are displayed. A point

whose registered point number is highlighted is

targeted for registration and search.

Shown below is the correlation between the page

numbers and registered point numbers.

Page no. Registered points Page no. Registered points

0 01–06 5 51–56

1 11–16 6 61–66

2 21–26 7 71–76

3 31–36 8 81–86

4 41–46 9 91–96

Page operations

Pages can be scrolled in the forward or reverse direction

using the [F1] (PREV) or [F2] (NEXT) function buttons.

•

Depending on the setting selected for [F4] (ROTATE)

on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the following applies to

scrolling pages in the forward direction.

When “OFF” is set:

Page 0 cannot be scrolled forward from page 9.

When “ON” is set:

Page 0 can be scrolled forward from page 9.

•

In scrolling pages in the reverse direction, page 9

cannot be scrolled in reverse from page 0.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

F1 F2

Search mode

The desired search point can be selected, and the

tape can be prerolled to that point.

When the display page has been changed using the

[(PREV) or (NEXT) button on the <CUE>

menu, the following applies depending on the setting

for (PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

When “MANU” is set:

Both the search and registered points move to the top

of the changed page.

When “AUTO” is set:

Only the search point moves to the top of the changed

page; the registered point does not move.

Cue point registration

Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the point which is to

be registered. When the button is pressed, the

current tape position is registered as the cue point.

The following applies depending on the setting for

(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

When “MANU” is set:

Operations are performed on the selected page.

Press the button to register the points in

succession (CUE¢1 >CUE¢2 >... >CUE¢6) on

the selected page. (Any points already registered will

be overwritten.)

The registration is automatically terminated when

CUE¢6 is registered on the page. (*1)

A change must be made to the points to be registered

if more cue points are to be registered. Check that

the cue point registration mode is established, change

the page, and change the points to be registered. In

this case, the search point will also move

automatically to the top (CUE¢1) of the changed

page.

(*1)If “ON” is selected as the ](ROTATE) setting

on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the

cue points will rotate on the same page in the

following order: CUE¢1 >CUE¢2 >... >

CUE¢6 >CUE¢1 >CUE¢2 >...

SET

F2F1

When “AUTO” is set:

When a page become full during the cue point

registration process, operation automatically moves to

the next page, and registration continues. When

CUE96 on the last page is reached, registration is

automatically terminated. (*2)

A change must be made to the points to be registered

if more cue points are to be registered. Check that

the cue point registration mode is established, change

the page, and change the points to be registered. In

this case, the search point will not be changed.

(*2)If “ON” is selected as the (ROTATE) setting

on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the

cue points will rotate from page 9 (CUE96) to

page 0 (CUE01).

When registering cue points by number

1. Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired

registered point display area.

2. Press the button twice. Only the “10’s” hour

digit of the selected cue point is now highlighted,

and the change enable status is established.

<Note>

When “REV” has been selected as the setup menu

item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input of the

number will start from the higher-order digit (it will

be displayed starting from the far right).

3. Input the number using the number keys.

Movement from one digit to the next is done

automatically after one number has been input.

The desired digit can also be selected by turning

the ADJUST dial.

4. To enter the number, press the button.

When the display screen is switched or when the

button is pressed during the input process, the

change enable status is released, and the setting is

canceled.

ENT

Function menus

<CUE>

CUE

Function menus

<CUE>

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

PREV Press ___

Description of setting

For multi-cue page forward scrolling.

Setting

___

NEXT Press ___ For multi-cue page reverse scrolling.

___

CLR Press ___ For clearing the currently selected cue data.

ENTRY must be selected as the F3 (MODE) setting.

___

AL CLR FiPress ___ When MANU is selected by SHIFT + F3 (PAGE): All the cue

data on the currently displayed page is cleared.

When AUTO is selected by SHIFT + F3 (PAGE): All the cue

data on all the pages is cleared.

___

MODE Toggle ___ For selecting the search or cue point registration mode.SEARCH

ENTRY

F2 (SHIFT)

CARD FiPress ___ For calling the MULTI CUE file operation menu.

___

F3 (SHIFT)

PAGE Toggle No. 131

PAGE MODE

Refer to the setup menu.MANU

AUTO

F4 (SHIFT)

ROTATE Toggle No. 132

ROTA MODE

Refer to the setup menu.OFF

F5 (SHIFT)

CU-ROL Toggle i

ADJ

No. 011

CU-ROLL TIME

Refer to the setup menu.0s --- 5s ---

15s

___ ___ ___ ______

F6 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

$Clearing individual registered points

When the (CLR) button on the <CUE> menu is

pressed, the currently selected cue point data is

cleared.

* The point is cleared only when “ENTRY” (cue point

registration mode) is selected as the setting for ]

(MODE) on the <CUE> menu.

Search operations

Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired

registered point.

When the PREROLL button is pressed, the preroll

operation is initiated. The tape will not be prerolled if

no cue points have been registered.

Since the tape is not prerolled even if the PREROLL

button is pressed when the cue point registration

mode is established, be absolutely sure to check that

the search mode is established.

(The time selected by the <CUE SHIFT> menu [

(CU-ROL) setting, which is different from the normal

preroll time, takes effect as the preroll time in this

mode.)

Clearing registered points

$Clearing all the registered points together

When (AL CLR) on the <CUE> menu is pressed

while the button is held down, all the cue point data

currently selected is cleared. The range of the points

which are cleared is as follows depending on the

setting for (PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

When “MANU” is set:

All the points on the currently selected page are

cleared.

When “AUTO” is set:

All the points on all the pages are cleared.

After clearing, the search and registered points

appear as follows depending on the setting for

(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.

When “MANU” is set:

A return is made to the top (CUE¢1) of the page

concerned.

When “AUTO” is set:

A return is made automatically to the top (CUE01) of

the first page.

* Points are cleared whether “ENTRY” (cue point

registration mode) or “SEARCH” (search mode) is selected

as the setting for [](MODE) on the <CUE> menu.

* This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Function menus

<DIAG>

Warning display

When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning mark

(W) blinks at the top left of the screen. If (WARN)

is now pressed, the details of the warning can be

checked out on the LCD monitor.

When more than one warning has occurred, turn the

ADJ dial to scroll through the messages.

Hour-meter display

When (HOURS) is pressed, the hour-meter

information can be checked out on the LCD monitor.

Error log function

The error log mode can be selected by pressing the

button and switching the screen to <DIAG

SHIFT>.

SHIFT

General description

When the following warnings have occurred while the

tape is running, the warning messages, time codes

and operating modes are saved, and a list of this

information can be read out on the LCD monitor. Up

to 99 warnings which have occurred can be saved. If

the storage capacity of 99 warnings is exceeded, the

processing that is conducted as a result is based on

the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO STEP) setting.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Warning mark

The warnings and hour-meter can be checked on

these menu screens. On the SHIFT menu screen,

error log files can be checked, deleted or saved onto

or loaded from IC cards.

Warning messages

which are saved

NO RF

Description

(Refer to page 118 and following.)

A blank section on the tape lasting more

than 1 second has been detected.

(During normal playback)

SV NOT LOCKED The servo has been disengaged for more

than 3 seconds. (During recording,

normal playback or editing)

LOW RF An envelope level which is about 1/3 of

normal or a CTL level which is about 1/6

of normal has been detected for more

than 1 second. (During recording, normal

playback or editing)

HIGH ERROR RATE The error rate has deteriorated, and

correction or compensation has been

applied to the video or audio playback

signals. (During normal playback)

LCD monitor displays

Operation mode display

This indicates the operation mode at the point when

the warning was saved.

Warning display

This indicates the warning message which is saved.

Saved warning status display

This indicates the number of the currently displayed

warning which has been saved and the total number

of warnings which have been saved.

Time code display

This indicates the time code at the point when the

warning was saved.

Cueing up the tape to the warning point

The warning list displayed on the LCD monitor can be

scrolled by turning the ADJ dial. When the warning

occurrence point to be checked is selected and the

PREROLL button is pressed, the tape is cued up to

the position of the time code which has been saved.

Operation mode display

Warning display

Saved warning status display

Time code display

DIAG

Function menus

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

WARN ___ ___

Description of setting

For displaying the warning messages on the LCD monitor.

Setting

___

HOURS ___ ___ For displaying the hour-meter on the LCD monitor.

___

F1 (SHIFT)

STEP Toggle No. 015

AUTO STEP

Refer to the setup menu.OFF

F2 (SHIFT)

CARD FiPress ___ For calling the error log file operation menu.

___

F4 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F5 (SHIFT)

AL CLR FiPress ___ For clearing error log files.

___

___ ___ ___ ______

F3 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

F6 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ___ ______

Concerning the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO

STEP) setting (default: OFF)

Up to 99 warning messages can be saved by the error

log function, and this setup menu item determines

what kind of save processing is to be conducted when

this storage capacity is exceeded.

OFF: 99 messages are set as the upper limit, and no

further messages of warnings that occur will be

saved.

ON: 99 messages are saved, and any further

message of a warnings that occurs is saved in

No.99. The warning messages already saved

are each shifted down by one number in

succession.

<DIAG>

No. in which

message is

saved

1/99

2/99

Saved warning

Warning 1

Warning 2

99/99 Warning 99

No. in which

message is

saved

1/99

Saved warning

Warning 2

2/99

Warning 3

99/99 Warning 100

When up to 99 messages have been saved

and the 100th warning has occurred

Messages saved when ON is selected as the setting

Function menus

<MENU>

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

These enable movement to the menu screens for

operations (adjustments, saving data onto or loading it

from the internal memory or IC cards) relating to the

SYSTEM and SETUP menus.

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

FILE FiPress ___

Description of setting

For calling the operation menu for saving the SYSTEM and

SETUP adjustment values (in the internal memory).

Setting

___

CARD FiPress ___ For calling the operation menu for saving the SYSTEM and

SETUP adjustment values (onto the IC card).

___

SYSTEM FiPress ___ For calling the SYSTEM adjustment operation menu.

___

SETUP FiPress ___ For calling the SETUP adjustment operation menu.

___

F1 (SHIFT)

PF1 FT FiPress ___ For calling the PF1/function button assignment operation

menu.

___

F2 (SHIFT)

PF1 BK FiPress ___ For calling the PF1/function button assignment operation

menu.

___

F3 (SHIFT)

PF2 FT FiPress ___ For calling the PF2/function button assignment operation

menu.

___

F4 (SHIFT)

PF2 BK FiPress ___ For calling the PF2/function button assignment operation

menu.

___

F5 (SHIFT)

50P IN FiPress ___ For calling the 50-pin (input pin) assignment operation

menu.

___

___ ___ ___ ______

F6 (SHIFT)

50P OT FiPress ___ For calling the 50-pin (output pin) assignment operation

menu.

___

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Function menus

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

ASSEM Toggle ___

Description of setting

For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.

When the display is highlighted, the ASSEMBLE editing

mode is set to ON, and the ASSEM button lights.

Setting

OFF

___ ___ ___ ______

*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this

menu screen.

Automatic editing and manual editing

• When the editing mode has been selected (the

button is lighted), automatic editing or

manual editing can be performed even after the

ASSEMBLE screen has been exited.

• After the edit IN and OUT points have been

registered (the and buttons are lighted),

the tape can be prerolled to an IN point or cued up

to an IN or OUT point even after the ASSEMBLE

screen has been exited.

OUTIN

ASSEM

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

IN point OUT point

Function menus

Registering the edit points

After the edit IN and OUT points have been

registered, the and buttons light.

Automatic editing and manual editing

• When the editing mode has been selected (the

button is lighted), automatic editing or

manual editing can be performed even after the

INSERT screen has been exited.

• After the edit IN and OUT points have been

registered (the and buttons are lighted),

the tape can be prerolled to an IN point or cued up

to an IN or OUT point even after the INSERT

screen has been exited.

OUTIN

INSERT

OUTIN

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

A5, A1

A6, A2

A7, A3

A8, A4

T, CUE

Toggle ___

Description of setting

For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF and selecting

the editing channels.

With the exception of the function button (F1), two channels

are allocated.

Use the SHIFT button to move the marker up or down, and

while specifying the channels, press the function buttons to

select them. Pressing the SHIFT button on other screens

serves a different purpose (screen switching) from its use

here.

For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.

When one of the channel displays is highlighted, the

INSERT editing mode is set to ON, and the INSERT button

lights.

Setting

___

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

IN point OUT point

AUDIO IN point

Marker

AUDIO OUT point

The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are

selected on this menu screen.

INSERT

Function menus

Selecting the menu items

Select the menu item by turning the ADJ dial.

(The cursor is moved down when the dial is turned

clockwise and up when it is turned counter-

clockwise.)

• Forward or reverse page scrolling (SETUP

menu only)

The menu list is organized by category, and the

pages can be scrolled in the forward or reverse

direction on a category by category basis.

(:PREV), (;NEXT)

<Note>

The screen may continue to scroll for a few

moments after the ADJ dial has been turned.

F2F1

Changing the settings

1. In the menu item selection status, press the

ADJ dial.

At this time, the setting of the menu item

indicated by the menu item selection cursor

blinks on the monitor.

2. Turn the ADJ dial to select the setting. (Turn it

clockwise to move up through the settings and

counterclockwise to move down through the

settings.)

When the ADJ dial is pressed again, the menu

item selection status is restored.

<Notes>

• Setting items which have submenus

A submenu is opened by pressing the

button. The same operations as the ones

described above are then used to change the

settings.

• Canceling individual items

When (CANCEL) is pressed, the setting

operation is canceled, and the item selection

status is restored.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

Item selection cursor

Monitor display menu

SETUP menu Change mark

Change mark

SYSTEM menu

Item number

Category

Setting

Setting number

Item name

Function menus

<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>

Press (RESET) while holding down the button.

All the registered item names and registered values

are now set to the factory settings. (These settings

cannot be restored.)

FF4

Registering functions in the input pins/Active inputs

Registering functions in the output pins/Active outputs

Clearing

Resetting all the items and values

Selecting the 50-pin connector pins

Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and

select the pin of the 50-pin connector into which the

menu item is to be registered.

Entering the 50-pin connector pins

Press the ADJ dial.

The entered 50-pin connector pin display is highlighted.

4. Entering the menu item

Press the ADJ dial.

The on-screen setting display now blinks.

Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and select the

pin of the 50-pin connector whose menu item is to be cleared.

2. Press (RESET). The registered item name

and registered value displays now go blank.

3. To clear the menu items in other 50-pin connector

pins, repeat steps 1 and 2.

Selecting the menu item

Turn the ADJ dial and select the menu item for the pin

of the 50-pin connector which was selected in step 1

above.

5. Selecting the setting

Turn the ADJ dial and select the setting for the

menu item which was selected in step 3 above.

Entering the setting

Press the ADJ dial

What is to be operated by the ADJ dial returns to the

front panel. Whatever was selected in step 3 is

displayed as the registered item name and whatever was

selected in step 5 is displayed as the registered value.

7. To select menu items and settings for other 50-pin

connector pins, repeat steps 1 to 6.

8. Saving the data in the 50-pin registration file

To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in

the 50-pin registration file, press (SET).

If (EXIT) is pressed without the above settings

have been saved, those settings will be canceled.

Special IN menu list

No.

SUPER

DISPLAY Description of setting

B00

STBY ON For transferring to the STANDBY ON mode.

B01

STBY OFF For transferring to the STANDBY OFF mode.

B02

STBY ONOFF For alternately transferring to the STANDBY ON

and OFF mode.

B03

EJECT For transferring to the EJECT mode.

B04

CUE For prerolling the tape to the IN point when the

IN point has been registered; for prerolling the

tape to the current point when the IN point has

not been registered.

B05

IN SET For registering the edit IN point.

B06

STILL For transferring to the still picture (STILL) mode.

B07

422 REM ON The 9-pin connector functions.

B08

422 REM OFF The 9-pin connector does not function.

B09

TC EXT For returning TC SOURCE to the previous EXT

mode.

(No switching occurs if the EXT mode is

currently established

B10

TC INT AUTO For switching TC SOURCE to INT and TCG

MODE to AUTO.

B20

PROTECT

HALF

For switching the tape protection mode operation to

half-loading in the event that the VTR has been left

standing in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while

any of the search modes (JOG, VAR or SHTL) was

established.

B21

PROTECT

T-REL

For switching the tape protection mode operation to

tension release when the VTR has been left standing

in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while any of the

search modes (JOG, VAR or SHTL) was established.

Functions not featured on the setup menua

SRC PROTECT and STOP PROTECT settings switched simultaneously

To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in

the 50-pin registration file, press (SET).

If (EXIT) is pressed without the above settings

have been saved, those settings will be canceled.

50P IN/OUT

ASSIGN

B11

TC EXT_L

REG

For switching TC SOURCE to EXT_L and TCG

MODE to REGEN.

Function menus

Special IN menu list (continued)

Special OUT menu list

No.

SUPER

DISPLAY Description of setting

B22

UD FIT_V

For switching the picture angle during down-conversion to

letter box and the picture angle during up-conversion to the

top/bottom cut status in the vertical direction.

B23

UD FIT_H

For switching the picture angle during down-

conversion to the side cut mode and the picture angle

during up-conversion to the side panel mode.

B24

UD FIT_HV

For switching the picture angle during down-

conversion to the squeeze mode and the picture

angle during up-conversion to the stretch mode.

UPCON MODE and DOWNCON MODE settings switched simultaneously

No.

SUPER

DISPLAY Description of setting

C00

EJECT EJECT status

C01

STBY ON STANDBY ON status

C02

CUE CUE-UP completed status

C03

STILL STILL status

C04

PANEL STOP Status in which the front panel STOP button is

pressed down

C05

PRE CTL Status of whether to inhibit overwrite during

normal recording

C06

422 REM ON 9-pin connector function status

C07

REMOTE 50-pin connector function status

C08

REC INH1 Recording inhibit status 1

C09

REC INH2 Recording inhibit status 2

C10

CAS INH1 Tape recording inhibit status 1

C11

CAS INH2 Tape recording inhibit status 2

C12

TC SRC1 TC input status 1

No.

SUPER

DISPLAY Description of setting

C16

DC3 Down-conversion status 3

C17

UC1 Up-conversion status 1

C18

UC2 Up-conversion status 2

C19

UD1 Up-conversion/down-conversion status 1

C20

UD2 Up-conversion/down-conversion status 2

C21

UD3 Up-conversion/down-conversion status 3

C22

ERR0 Error status 0

C23

ERR1 Error status 1

C24

ERR2 Error status 2

C26

CH GREEN Channel condition green LED

C27

CH AMBER Channel condition amber LED

C28

CH RED Channel condition red LED

C29

SERVO LOCK

Servo lock LED

C30

V UNITY Video UNITY LED

C31

A UNITY Audio UNITY LED

<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>

C13

TC SRC2 TC input status 2

C14

DC1 Down-conversion status 1

C15

DC2 Down-conversion status 2

C22

ERR0 C23

ERR1 C24

ERR2 Error status

000

SERVO NOT LOCKED (priority level 1)

001

SERVO LOCKED (priority level 4)

010

HIGH ERROR (amber) (priority level 3)

011

HIGH ERROR (red) (priority level 2)

Error statuses

C12

TC SRC1 C13

TC SRC2 TC input status

External SLTC

External LTC

External SVITC (or external VITC with SD input)

INT

TC input statuses

C10

CAS INH1

C11

CAS INH2

Tape recording inhibit status

Cassette recording enabled

Cassette accidental erasure prevented

Tape recording inhibit statuses

Recording inhibit statuses

Function menus

<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>

C08

REC INH1 C09

REC INH2 Recording inhibit statuses

Overwriting prohibited during normal recording

All recording onto cassette prohibited

Recording inhibit mode other than the 2 above modes

Recording onto cassette enabled

Down-conversion statuses

C14

DC1 C15

DC2 C16

DC3 Down-conversion status

000

Squeeze mode

010

Side cut modea

100

Letter box mode

110

14:9

111

13:9

Up-conversion statuses

C17

UC1 C18

UC2 Up-conversion status

Stretch mode

Side panel mode

Top and bottom cut in vertical direction

Up-conversion down-conversion statuses

C19

UD1 C20

UD2 C21

UD3 Down-conversion

status Up-conversion

status

000

Squeeze mode

010

Side cut mode

100Letter box mode

Stretch mode

Side panel mode

Top and bottom cut

in vertical direction

111 Any other combination

The statuses established by a multiple number of pins

in the special OUT menu list are displayed. Pin status

“1” signifies “active low” and “0” signifies “open.”

50P IN/OUT

ASSIGN

Function menus

<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>

50P IN/OUT ASSIGN function buttons

Function

button/item Switching

method Corresponding setup

menu item

:PREV Press ___

Description of setting

For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward

direction.

Setting

___

;NEXT Press ___ For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse

direction.

___

RESET Press

FiPress

___

For resetting one pin: what has been selected for the pin

selected by the individual reset selection marker is cleared.

For resetting all the pins: what has been registered in all the pins is

set to the factory settings and set in the 50-pin registration file.

___

SET Press ___ For registering the file; all the function button settings are

saved in the 50-pin registration file.

___

EXIT Press ___ For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original

menu).

___

CANCEL Press ___ For releasing the menu item selection status.

___

F1 (SHIFT)

F2 (SHIFT)

F3 (SHIFT)

F4 (SHIFT)

F5 (SHIFT)

F6 (SHIFT)

___ ___ ______

Flow of registration

Status in which regis-

tered 50-pin connector

pin selection is enabled

Status in which selected 50-

pin connector pin menu item

selection is enabled

Status in which selected

menu item setting

selection is enabled

Open the

screen.

Close the

screen.

F6 (EXIT)

Press the ADJ dial.

F3 (cancel)

Press the ADJ dial.

F3 (cancel) Press the ADJ dial.

Turn the ADJ dial.

F4 (one pin reset)

F iF4 (all pins reset)

F5 (settings entered)

Turn the ADJ dial.

F1 (forward page scroll)

F2 (reverse page scroll)

Turn the ADJ dial.

Function menus

<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>

50-pin assignment factory settings

no. I/O Setting item

REC

PLAY

REW

STOP

___

422 REMOTE ON

422 REMOTE OFF

10 I LOCAL ENABLE

11 I EJECT

12 I IN SET

13 I REC INH ALL

14 I REC INH PRE

15 I LOCAL DISABLE

16 I TC EXT

17 I TC INT&TCG MODE AUTO

18 I ___

19 I ___

20 I STNDBY ON/OFF

21 O ERR0 STATUS

22 I DET STOP ON

23 I CUE

24 O ERR1 STATUS

25 I DET STOP OFF

26 Power

27 O REC STATUS

28 O PLAY STATUS

29 O FF STATUS

30 O REW STATUS

31 O STOP STATUS

32 O 422 REMOTE STATUS

33 O EJECT STATUS

34 O ERR2 STATUS

35 O TC SRC1 STATUS

36 O TC SRC2 STATUS

37 O ___

38 O ___

39 O REC INH1 STATUS

40 O REC INH2 STATUS

no. I/O Setting item

41 O CUE STATUS

42 O REMOTE STATUS

43 O DET STOP STATUS

44 O PRE CTL DETECTED STATUS

45 O LOCAL ENABLE STATUS

46 O STANDBY ON STATUS

47 GND

48 O ___

49 GND

50 GND

“__” denotes that nothing is subject to control or to a status.

50P IN/OUT

ASSIGN

<Notes>

• For a command, input TTL level signals; for an

active low edge, input an electrical signal of 100 ms

or more.

• For a status, a maximum open collector and sink

current of 6 mA is output.

LOCAL HD

AJ-HD1700

External encoder remote

controller

BOTH

BOTH HD External encoder remote

controller/AJ-HD1700

BOTH

Setting Adjustment item

05:

ENCODER

SEL

06:

V LEVEL

CTRL

662: V LEVEL

663: C LEVEL

664: HUE ( or C PHASE)

665: SETUP LVL (or BK LVL)

REMOTE

System menus

No./Item Description of setting

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

WFM SEL

This enables one of a number of different signals

to be output from the VIDEO OUT 2 output

connector.

0000 CTL

:The CTL signal is output.

0001 TC

:The time code signal is output.

0002 VIDEO

The video output signal is output.

0003 RF_L

:The PB L RF signal is output.

0004 RF_R

:The PB R RF signal is output.

0005 ENV_L

:The PB L ENV signal is output.

0006 ENV_R

:The PB L ENV signal is output.

<Notes>

• The setting can be changed at any time without

being affected by the system menu item No.30

(MENU LOCK) setting.

• The output signals during normal playback

virtually maintain the levels given below.

CTL: 0.1 to.3Vp-p TC: 0.6Vp-p

VIDEO: 1.0Vp-p

ENCODER

SEL

For setting whether to perform the various

adjustments for the video output signals using this

VTR or using an external encoder remote

controller.

0000

REMOTE:

The various adjustments for the video output

signals are performed by an external encoder

remote controller.

0001

LOCAL:

The various adjustments for the video output

signals are performed using this VTR.

0002 BOTH:

The various adjustments for the video output

signals are performed using both this VTR and

an external encoder remote controller.

V LEVEL

CTRL

For selecting what is to be controlled when

the video output level is to be adjusted by an

external encoder remote controller.

0000 HD:

The HD video output level can be adjusted.

0001 SD:

The SD video output level can be adjusted.

0002 BOTH:

Both the HD and SD video output levels can be

adjusted.

Video output signal adjustments

The control matrix for the adjustments is shown in the table below.

LOCAL HD

AJ-HD1700

External encoder

remote controller

AJ-HD1700

No adjustments

possible

External encoder

remote controller

No adjustments

possible

External encoder

remote controller

External encoder

remote controller

BOTH

BOTH HD

External encoder remote

controller/AJ-HD1700

AJ-HD1700

External encoder remote

controller/AJ-HD1700

AJ-HD1700

External encoder remote

controller/AJ-HD1700

External encoder remote

controller/AJ-HD1700

BOTH

Setting Adjustment item

05:

ENCODER

SEL

06:

V LEVEL

CTRL

653: Y LVL (HD)

654: Pb LVL (HD)

655: Pr LVL (HD)

656: BK LVL (HD)

658: Y LVL (SD)

659: Pb LVL (SD)

660: Pr LVL (SD)

661: BK LVL (SD)

REMOTE

External encoder remote controller: Only adjustments of the

external encoder remote controller are performed.

AJ-HD1700: Only adjustments of the setup menu items are

performed.

External encoder remote controller/AJ-HD1700: Adjustments can

be performed from both the external encoder remote controller and

setup menus.

<Note>

Use the AJ-ER50, an optional accessory, as the external encoder

remote controller. However, its VIDEO PHASE and SYNC PHASE

controls will not work.

When “CMPNT” has been selected as the setup menu item

No.650 (STYLE) setting

When “CMPST” has been selected as the setup menu item

No.650 (STYLE) setting

External encoder remote controller: Only adjustments of the external

encoder remote controller are performed.

AJ-HD1700: Only adjustments of the setup menu items are performed.

External encoder remote controller/AJ-HD1700: Adjustments can be

performed from both the external encoder remote controller and setup

menus.

<Note>

Use the MT-200 (manufactured by Musashi and recommended by

Panasonic) as the external encoder remote controller. However, its

VIDEO PHASE, SYNC PHASE and SC PHASE controls will not work.

COARSE

For adjusting the VIDEO OUT system phase in 1H

steps.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

0000 j5H

0005 0H

0010 5H

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged

even when the factory setting

operation is performed.

No./Item Description of setting

SYS H

(HD)*UP

For adjusting the system phase of the HD SDI output.

When the button is pressed, the display transfers to

the submenu screen; press the button again to

return the display from the submenu screen.

SHIFT

COARSE

For adjusting the system phase of the HD SDI

output in 1H steps.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

0000 j5H

0005 0H

0010 5H

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged

even when the factory setting

operation is performed.

FINE

For adjusting the HD SDI output system

phase in 13.5ns steps.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

<59/60Hz> <23/24Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (HD,SD)>

0000 j1100 0000 j1375 0000 j1320

:: ::::

1100 01375 01320 0

:: ::::

2200 1100 2700 1375 2640 1320

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged even when the

factory setting operation is performed.

Submenu screen

FINE

For adjusting the SD SDI system phase in 37ns

steps for 480i outputs and in 54ns steps for 480p

outputs.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)>

0000 j858 0000 j864

:: ::

0858 00864 0

:: ::

1716 858 1728 864

System menus

No./Item Description of setting

VO SYS

H (SD)*DW

For adjusting the system phase of the VIDEO OUT.

When the button is pressed, the display transfers to

the submenu screen; press the button again to

return the display from the submenu screen.

SHIFT

FINE

For adjusting the VIDEO OUT system phase in

37ns steps.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)>

0000 j858 0000 j864

:: ::

0858 00864 0

:: ::

1716 858 1728 864

SD SYS

H (SD)*DW

For adjusting the system phase of the SD SDI.

When the button is pressed, the display transfers to

the submenu screen; press the button again to

return the display from the submenu screen.

SHIFT

Submenu screen

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*UP: This is for HD outputs (during HD tape playback or up-

conversion outputs).

*DW:This is for SD outputs (during SD tape playback or down-

conversion outputs).

COARSE

For adjusting the SD SDI system phase in 1H

steps.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

0000 j5H

0005 0H

0010 5H

Submenu screen

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged

even when the factory setting

operation is performed.

SYS SC

(SD)*DW

For adjusting the system phase over a total

variable range of more than d180o.

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)

0000 j108 0000 j115

:: ::

0108 00115 0

:: ::

0216 108 0230 115

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged even when the

factory setting operation is performed.

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged even when the

factory setting operation is performed.

<Note>

This setting remains unchanged even when the

factory setting operation is performed.

59/60 Hz mode: Status in which “0” (59/60) has been

selected

50 Hz mode: Status in which “1” (50) has been

selected

23/24 Hz mode: Status in which “2” (23/24) has been

selected

25 Hz (HD) mode: Status in which “3” (25 (HD)) has been

selected

25 Hz (SD) mode: Status in which “4” (25(SD)) has been

selected

System menus

*System switching

• Some of the system menu and setup menu items each have

different settings for different operation modes (59/60 Hz, 50

Hz, 23/24 Hz and 25 Hz (HD or SD)). These settings are

saved separately.

(This concerns those items whose settings were described

for each operation mode on the system menu and setup

menu tables.)

• For further details, refer to “How to switch the system

frequency” on page 105.

• Since this VTR becomes a playback-only unit when the

23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected,

the functions relating to EE, recording and editing are all

set to the inhibited status. Neither is it possible to select

CTL in such a case.

(The related menus and function buttons are not

displayed, and operation is prohibited.)

For the instant when the tape begins to run at the 1k

speed such as when it starts playing from the STOP

status, the image is disrupted and the sound is muted for

several frames because the tape is being synchronized

with the REF input.

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*DW:This is for SD outputs (during SD tape playback or down-

conversion outputs).

No./Item Description of setting

SCH (SD)*DW

For adjusting the SCH phase.

When the button is pressed, the display transfers to

the submenu screen; press the button again to

return the display from the submenu screen.

SHIFT

COARSE

For adjusting the SCH phase in 90

steps

(The SC phase changes, and the H phase remains

unchanged.)

0000: 0

0001: 90

0002: 180

0003: 270

Submenu screen

No./Item Description of setting

MENU LOCK

For selecting whether to set or release the

system file lock mode.

0000 OFF

Lock released (changes enabled)

0001 ON

Lock set (changes prohibited)

<Note>

Even when “ON” is selected, the data will be overwritten

when the system file has been set to LOAD from the IC

card.

<Notes>

• This setting remains unchanged even when the

factory setting operation is performed.

• For the steps to take to switch the system

frequency, refer to page 105.

SYSTEM

FREQ*

FINE

For adjusting the SCH phase over a total variable

range of more than d45

j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.

(The SC phase changes, and the H phase remains

unchanged.)

0000 j32

0032 0

0064 32

AV PHASE

For adjusting the audio output phase in relation to

the video output phase in 20.8¨s steps.

The audio output phase is advanced in relation to

the video output phase.

The audio output phase is delayed in relation to

the video output phase.

0000 j100

0100 0

0200 100

For selecting the system frequency.

0: The 59.94 Hz or 60 Hz system frequency is selected.

1: The 50 Hz system frequency is selected.

2: The 23.98 Hz or 24 Hz system frequency is selected.

3: The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.

However, with SD SDI and video output signals, there

is a delay of approximately one field compared with

the HD SDI output.

4: The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.

However, HD SDI output is muted.

0003 59/60

0001* 50*

0002 23/24

0003 25 (HD)

0004 25 (SD)

* The asterisk denotes the

factory setting for AJ-

HD1700E

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<BASIC>

No./Item Description of setting

000

P-ROLL TIME

For setting the preroll time.

Any time from 0 to 30 seconds can be set in 1-

second increments.

0000 0s

0005 5s

0030 30s

<Notes>

•During automatic editing (PREVIEW or AUTO EDIT),

no operations are performed if the preroll time is set

to 0 seconds.

•If the phases are to be synchronized between two

decks for editing as per the setup menu item No.004

(SYNCHRONIZE) setting, set the preroll time to at

least 2 seconds.

001

LOCAL ENA

For selecting the transport system buttons

which can be operated on the front panel in

the REMOTE mode.

0000 DIS

:No buttons can be operated.

0001 ST&EJ

Only the STOP and EJECT buttons can be

operated.

0002 ENA

All the buttons except for the RECORDER and

PLAYER buttons can be operated.

<Note>

The following buttons and dials function at all times

regardless of this setting:

Audio input/output level control dials, audio channel

selector buttons, number keys, function buttons, direct

menu button, ASSEM button, INSERT button, ADJ dial,

headphone volume control dial, MONITOR SELECT

button, METER (FULL/FINE) selector switch, REMOTE

button.

002*1

TAPE TIMER

For selecting the 12- or 24-hour system for

the CTL counter display.

0000 d12h

:12-hour system display

0001 24h

:24-hour system display

005

SUPER

For selecting whether or not to superimpose

the display of the time code or other data

onto the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR

and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.

0000 OFF

The time code or other data is not displayed.

0001 ON

The time code or other data is displayed.

003

REMAIN SEL

For selecting whether or not to display REMAIN

(remaining tape time) on the superimposed

display of the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI

MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.

0000 OFF

The remaining tape time is not displayed.

0001 2L

The remaining tape time is displayed on the

second line.

0002 1L

The remaining tape time is displayed on the

first line.

0003 R/TTL

The remaining tape time is displayed on the

first line, and the total tape time is displayed on

the second line.

<Notes>

•When setting 1 (2L) has been selected, the remaining

tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME) is selected as

the setup menu item No.006 (DISPLAY SEL) setting.

•When setting 3 (R/TTL) has been selected, the

remaining tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME) is

selected as the setup menu item No.006 (DISPLAY

SEL) setting.

006

DISPLAY SEL

For selecting the time code and other

displays to be superimposed onto the HD SDI

MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO

OUT3 connectors.

0000 TIME

Only the time is displayed.

0001 T&STA

The time and operation mode are displayed.

0002 T&S&M

The time, operation mode and mode are

displayed.

0003 T&RT

The time and REC TIME are displayed.

0004 T&YMD

The time and REC DATE (year/month/day) are

displayed.

0005 T&MDY

The time and REC DATE (month/day/year) are

displayed.

0006 T&DMY

The time and REC DATE (day/month/year) are

displayed.

0007 T&UB

Data and user’s bit are displayed.

However, when UB has been selected with the

(TC/CTL) on the HOME menu, the time

code is displayed after the user

’

s bit.

0008 T&CTL

Data and CTL data are displayed.

However, when CTL has been selected with

the (TC/CTL) on the HOME menu, the time

code is displayed after the CTL data.

0009 T&T

Data and time code are displayed.

(See Notes on next page.)

No./Item Description of setting

004*1

SYNCHRONIZE

For setting whether or not to synchronize the

phases between two decks.

0000 OFF

The phases are not synchronized. The edit

points will be off by several frames but editing

will be commenced more promptly.

0001 ON

The phases are synchronized. Error-free

editing can be performed.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<BASIC> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

008

CHARA

V-POS

For setting the vertical positions of the

characters for the time code and other

superimposed displays of the HD SDI

MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO

OUT3 connectors.

0000 0

0023 23

0032 32

<Note>

When this menu item has been set, the displays are

output to the VIDEO OUT3 connector in the DISPLAY

SEL status even when the SUPER OFF setting is

established. However, if the menu has been exited, the

SUPER OFF or ON setting is followed.

Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output to the VIDEO

OUT3 connector as per the menu setting.

007

CHARA

H-POS

For setting the horizontal positions of the

characters for the time code and other

superimposed displays of the HD SDI

MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO

OUT3 connectors.

0000 0

0006 6

0037 37

<Note>

When this menu item has been set, the displays are

output to the VIDEO OUT3 connector in the DISPLAY

SEL status even when the SUPER OFF setting is

established. However, if the menu has been exited, the

SUPER OFF or ON setting is followed.

Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output to the VIDEO

OUT3 connector as per the menu setting.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)

or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

020*2

SYS

FORMAT

For selecting the VTR’s recording format.

0000 1080i

The 1080i format is selected.

0001 720p

The 720p format is selected.

015

AUTO

STEP

For selecting the save processing to be

conducted when the memory capacity, which

enables up to 99 warning messages to be

saved, has been exceeded while the error log

function is operating.

0000

OFF

99 messages are set as the upper limit, and any

more warning messages which subsequently

occur are not saved in the memory.

0001 ON

99 messages are saved, and the next warning

message that has subsequently occurred is

saved as No.99. The warning messages already

saved are each shifted down by one number in

succession.

011

CU-ROLL

TIME

For setting the preroll time in the MULTI CUE

mode.

Any time from 0 to 15 seconds can be set in 1-

second increments.

0000 0s

0005 5s

0015 15s

010*1

MONI

CONTROL

For setting whether to forcibly set the recorder to

the EE mode and output the player’s playback

signals to the monitor if the PLAYER button on the

recorder is pressed when the monitor is connected

only to the recorder during deck-to-deck editing.

0000 MANU

The recorder is not forcibly set to the EE mode.

0001 AUTO

The recorder is forcibly set to the EE mode,

and the player’s playback signals are output

006

DISPLAY SEL

<Notes>

•The following mode displays appear depending on

the format used.

DVCPRO HD-LP >DVCPRO_HD-LP

DVCPRO HD >DVCPRO_HD

DVCPRO50 >DVCPRO_50

DVCPRO >DVCPRO

DV >DV

DVCAM >DVCAM

•When setting 2 (T&S&M) is selected, an error

message appears if a warning or error has occurred.

•REC TIME and REC DATE are displayed only during

DV or DVCAM format playback. The operation mode

is displayed when the DVCPRO HD-LP, DVCPRO

HD, DVCPRO50 or DVCPRO format is used.

009

CHARA TYPE

For setting the display type for the

superimposed displays and for the HD SDI

MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO

OUT3 connectors as well as for the SETUP

MENU, etc.

0000 WHITE

:White characters on a black

background.

0001 W/OUT

:White characters with black

borders.

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

Setup menus

<BASIC> (continued)

Formats in which the tape is played back

No./Item Description of setting

031*4

OUT REF

Video output reference

0000 AUTO

When the HD REF input signal is

supplied, it is used as the reference. If

it is not supplied but the SD REF input

signal is supplied, the SD REF signal

serves as the reference instead.

If neither the HD REF nor SD REF input

signal is supplied, the HD serial signal

serves as the reference.

If none of the HD REF, SD REF and

HD serial signals are supplied, the

internal sync signal serves as the

reference.

0001 INPUT

When the serial input signal is supplied,

it is used as the reference

0002 HD_REF

The signal which is input to the HD REF

IN connector is used as the reference.

0003 SD_REF

The signal which is input to the SD REF

IN connector is used as the reference.

<Note>

If the 1 (INPUT) setting is selected when the 25 Hz (HD)

mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, the system will

construe this to mean that the 0 (AUTO) setting has

been selected.

AUTO

-------- --------

022:

FORMAT

020:

SYS

FORMAT

023:

FORMAT

SEL

Playback format

MANUAL

1080i

720p

HD_LP

HD_SP

422

411

420p

DVCAM

HD_LP

HD_SP

422

411

420p

DVCAM

DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)

DVCPRO HD(1080i)

DVCPRO50(422)

DVCPRO(411)

DVCPROP(420p)

DVCAM

DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)

DVCPRO HD(720p)

DVCPRO50(422)

DVCPRO(411)

DVCPROP(420p)

DVCAM

DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)/

DVCPRO HD(1080i)/

DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)/

DVCPRO HD(720p)/

DVCPRO50(422)/

DVCPRO(411)/

DVCPROP(420p)/DV/

DVCAM, automatic detection

<Notes>

•In the EJECT mode, the format selected by the setup menu

item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting applies.

•If “AUTO” has been selected as the setup menu item No.022

(PB FORMAT) setting, the setup menu item No.023 (FORMAT

SEL) setting is used as the format when the format is not

detected (when the tape has just been inserted).

However, when “DV” or “DVCAM” has been selected, the VTR

operation will be as if “HD-LP” has been selected.

022

PB FORMAT

For selecting the format in which the tape is

to be played back.

0000 MANU

The format is determined by the setting selected for

setup menu item No.023 (FORMAT SEL).

0001 AUTO

The tape is played back in the format in which it was

recorded.

030*3

FREQUENCY

0000 59/23

The 59.94/23.98 Hz frequency is set.

0001 60/24

The 60/24 Hz frequency is set.

However, the field frequency set here is used

only when there is no input signal which

corresponds to the OUT REF setting. If there is a

corresponding input signal, the field frequency is

matched with that of the input signal.

023

FORMAT

SEL

For selecting the format when “MANUAL” has

been selected as the setup menu item No.022

(PB FORMAT) setting.

If “AUTO” is selected as the setting, the format when

playback starts is selected, and when the tape is

played back, the format is automatically detected and

matched with the format of the playback tape.

0000 HD-LP

:The DVCPRO HD-LP format is

selected, and the setup menu

item No.020 (SYS FORMAT)

setting is followed.

0001 HD-SP

:The DVCPRO HD format is

selected, and the setup menu

item No.020 (SYS FORMAT)

setting is followed.

0002 422

:The DVCPRO50 (422) format is

selected.

0003 411

:The DVCPRO (411) format is

selected.

0004 420p

:The DVCPROP (420p) format

is selected.

0005 DV

:The DV format is selected.

0006 DVCAM

:The DVCAM format is selected.

*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)

mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

No./Item Description of setting

100

SEARCH ENA

For selecting the direct search dial operation.

0000 DIAL

Direct search dial operations are performed.

0001 KEY

Operation does not transfer to the search

mode unless the SHTL, JOG or VAR button is

pressed.

101

SHTL MAX

For selecting the maximum speed of shuttle

operations.

0000 k9.8

9.8 times normal speed

0001 k16

16 times normal speed

0002 k32

32 times normal speed

<Note>

Depending on the tape format, the actual tape running

speed differs slightly from what is indicated by the

superimposed display.

102

FF. REW MAX

For setting the maximum speed of fast

forward and rewind operations.

0000 k16

16 times normal speed

0001 k32

32 times normal speed

0002 k50

50 times normal speed

0003 k60

60 times normal speed

0004 k100

100 times normal speed

<Note>

The maximum speed is automatically limited to 50x for

the DVCPRO HD and DVCPRO50 format and to 32x for

the DV and DVCAM formats.

104

REF ALARM

For selecting whether a warning is to be

displayed when the REF VIDEO signal has not

been connected.

0000 OFF

:A warning is not displayed.

0001 ON

:A warning is displayed by the

blinking STOP lamp.

105*1

AUTO EE SEL

For selecting the VTR mode which is to be set

to the EE mode when “0 (EE)” is selected as

the setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT)

setting.

0000 S/F/R

The EE mode is established when the VTR is

in the STOP, FF or REW mode.

0001 STOP

The EE mode is established when the VTR is

in the STOP mode only.

106

EJECT EE SEL

For selecting the video and audio output

statuses in the EJECT mode.

0000

The EE mode is always established regardless of

the setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) setting.

0001 BLACK

When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set to:

“EE”

The EE mode is established.

“

TAPE”

The BLACK mode is established for

the video signals, and the audio

signals are muted.

0002 GRAY

When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set to:

“EE”

The EE mode is established.

“

TAPE”

The GRAY mode is established for the

video signals, and the audio signals

are muted.

<Note>

If 0 (EE) is selected while the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, the VTR construes that

1 (BLACK) has been selected.

107*1

EE MODE SEL

For selecting what signals are to be output

when the EE mode is established.

0000

NORMAL

Signals delayed by an amount equivalent to the time taken

for the signals to be processed internally are output.

0001 THRU

The signals are not processed internally but output in their

original form with no delay.

<Note>

The internal operation forcibly sets “NORMAL” when an

editing mode is selected or when SDTI is selected

during video input signal selection.

111*1

MEMORY

STOP

For selecting whether to automatically stop the

VTR when the counter value is at the “0” position

during CTL mode FF and REW operations.

0000 OFF

The VTR does not stop.

0001 ON

The VTR is automatically stopped.

<Notes>

•Either the stop or still picture (SHTL STILL or VAR

STILL) mode, whichever has been set using setup

menu item No.307 (AFTER CUE-UP), is

established when the VTR is stopped.

•If both the AUTO REW function and MEMORY

function have been selected at the same time, the

AUTO REW operation takes priority.

110

AUTO REW

For selecting whether the tape is to be

automatically wound back to its beginning

when the tape-end has been detected.

0000 OFF

The tape stops when it reaches the

tape-end.

0001 ON

The tape is rewound to its beginning.

109*1

CAP. LOCK

For selecting whether to engage playback framing

lock in 4-field increments or in 2-field increments.

<59/60Hz> <50Hz>

0000 2F 0000 2F

0001 4F 0001 4F

0002 8F

108

PLAY DELAY

For setting the play startup time in 1-frame

increments.

0000 0

0015 15

No./Item Description of setting

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<OPERATION> (continued)

113*1

REC INH

For selecting whether to allow or inhibit recording

on the cassette tape.

0000 OFF

Recording on the cassette tape is enabled when the

cassette’s accidental erasure prevention mechanism

has been set to the recording enable position.

0001 ALL

All recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.

0002 PRE

Overwriting is inhibited during normal recording.

This is the setting to activate the accidental erasure

prevention function. While CTL is detected, the

recording is inhibited, and when CTL cannot be

detected, it is executed.

0003 NORM

Normal recording is inhibited.

Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid

using normal recording in all applications

except for editing.

0004 V/CTL

The recording of the video and CTL signals is

inhibited.

Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid editing

in all applications except for audio editing

<Note>

When the PRE, NORM or V/CTL setting has been

selected, the REC INHIBIT lamp blinks (on for approx.

0.5 sec. and then off for approx. 0.5 sec.).

No./Item Description of setting

Description of MEMORY STOP function

The MEMORY STOP function does

not work if this margin is less than

d2 frames.

button

0 point

button

REW

button

REW

button

!If the FF button is pressed, the normal FF operation is performed

since there is no 0 point in the direction of this operation.

@If the REW button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as does

the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it automatically

stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.

#If the REW button is pressed, the normal REW operation is

performed since there is no 0 point in the direction of this

operation.

$If the FF button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as does

the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it automatically

stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.

114

REC INH

LAMP

For selecting whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to

blink or light when the cassette tape has been set

to the accidental erasure protection mode.

0000 LIGHT

:The lamp lights.

0001 FLASH

:The lamp blinks.

<Note>

If 1 (ALL) has been selected as the setup menu item

No.113 (REC INH) setting, the REC INHIBIT lamp will

be lighted at all times regardless of the REC INH LAMP

setting.

115*1

EJECT SW

INH

For selecting whether to enable or disable the

operation of the EJECT button on the VTR’s

front panel.

0000 REC

:Operation is disabled while the

VTR is in the recording mode.

0001 OFF

:Operation is enabled in all

modes.

Accidental erasure protection function

This function is used to prevent parts already recorded on a tape from being

recorded over. Accidental erasure of pre-recorded tapes is prevented by

positioning the CTL signal rec/play heads as shown in the figure below so that

whether a recording has been made can be determined by the presence or

absence of the CTL signal. When the REC/PLAY button is pressed with a pre-

recorded tape, the tape runs but the REC button lamp blinks, the beeping

alarm is sounded, and no signals are recorded.

Rough sketch showing CTL head positions

PRE CTL

head

A/C heads

(rec/play heads)

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

No./Item Description of setting

112

FRZ MODE

SEL

For selecting what playback images are to be

output in the STANDBY OFF mode and EJECT

mode.

0000 DIS

The video output is muted.

0001 STB OFF

Only when the STANDBY OFF mode is

established is the image which was being

played back at that moment frozen and output.

0002 SOF&EJ

When either the STANDBY OFF mode or the

EJECT mode is established, the image which

was being played back at that moment is

frozen and output.

<Notes>

•The status when the picture is frozen is determined

by the setup menu item No.604 (FREEZE SEL)

setting.

•In the EJECT mode, the frozen picture is output only

when 1 (BLACK) or 2 (GRAY) has been selected as

the setup menu item No.106 (EJECT EE SEL)

setting.

•The picture freeze is forcibly released if a change has

occurred in the output format of the HD serial output

signals when operation has transferred to the EJECT

mode.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<OPERATION> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting

118*1

SP MODE

INH

For selecting whether to allow or inhibit

recording on a tape which has been written

by a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP.

0000 OFF

Recording on the cassette tape is allowed.

0001 ON

Recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.

<Notes>

•When 0 (OFF) has been selected, whether recording

on the cassette tape is allowed or inhibited is

determined by the setup menu item No.113 (REC

INH) setting.

•The recording format is determined by the setup

menu item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting.

131

PAGE MODE

For selecting what cue point operation is to

be performed when the multi cue function has

been set to ON.

0000 MANU

Operation is confined within the selected page,

and 6 cue points can be registered.

0001 AUTO

When the page whose cue points are being

registered becomes full, operation is

automatically transferred to the next page, and

registration is continued. A total of 60 cue

points on up to 10 pages can be registered.

132

ROTA MODE

For selecting whether to perform the

registration operation if all the cue points

have already been registered when the multi

cue function has been set to ON

0000 OFF

No further cue points are registered.

0001 ON

The registration operation is continued. If “MANU”

has been selected as the setup menu item No.131

(PAGE MODE) setting, the next cue point is

registered at CUE¢1 on the page concerned; if

“AUTO” has been selected, it is registered at CUE01.

No./Item Description of setting

140*1

OUTPUT

For selecting the output signals.

0000 EE

<In the STOP mode>:

The input signals selected by setup menu items

No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL)

to No.724 (D IN SEL 78) are output.

<During recording or editing>:

The input signals selected by setup menu items

No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL)

to No.724 (D IN SEL 78) are output:

0001 TAPE

The signals played back from the tape are output.

<During recording or editing>:

The simultaneous playback signals are output.

<Note>

In order to select the output signals during recording or

editing, set setup menu item No.302 (CONFI EDIT).

141*1

VOLUME

For setting what is to be controlled by the

audio volume controls on the front panel.

0000 REC

The controls function as REC volume controls.

0001 PB

The controls function as PB volume controls.

0002 AUTO

Normally, the controls function as PB volume

controls. However, during recording or in the

EE/INPUT CHECK status, they automatically

function as REC volume controls.

142*1

AUDIO UNITY

For selecting the conditions under which the

AUDIO UNITY lamp on the front panel is to light.

0000 IN

The lamp lights when all the audio input levels

are set to the UNITY level.

0001 OUT

The lamp lights when all the audio output

levels are set to the UNITY level.

0002 IN/OUT

The lamp lights when all the audio input and

output levels are set to the UNITY level.

143

CASSTT

LIGHT

For setting whether the lighting of the tape

mechanism is to be set to ON or remain OFF.

0000 OFF

The mechanism does not light even when a

cassette is inserted.

0001 ON

The mechanism lights when a cassette is inserted.

144

TC INPUT

For switching the preset registration method

for the time code.

0000 NORMAL:

The time code is input starting with the left-

most digit.

0001 REV

The time code is input from the high-order digit

but is displayed from the right-most digit.

145

FRONT LCD

For selecting whether the LCD monitor display on

the front panel is to be turned on or off.

0000 OFF

The display is turned off.

0001 ON

The display is turned on or off in synchronization

with the screen saver operation for the time code

display area.

133

KEY BEEP

For setting the volume of the sound heard

when the keys are touched.

0000 OFF

0001 LOW

0002 HIGH

134

ALARM BEEP

For setting the volume of the alarm tone.

0000 OFF

0001 LOW

0002 HIGH

<Note>

If the fan motor has shut down, the alarm tone is sounded

at the HIGH volume level regardless of this setting.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

116

EJECT LAMP

For selecting whether the EJECT lamp is to remain

lighted or go off after the cassette tape has been

ejected.

0000 MODE1

The EJECT lamp remains lighted.

0001 MODE2

The EJECT lamp goes off.

204

RS232C SEL

For selecting whether the RS-232C connector

is to function.

0000 OFF

:The RS-232C connector does

not function.

0001 ON

The RS-232C connector functions.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

No./Item Description of setting

200

PARA RUN

For selecting whether to operate two or more

VTRs in synchronization.

0000 DIS

:The VTRs are not operated in

synchronization.

0001 ENA

:The VTRs are operated in

synchronization.

<Note>

To operate the VTRs in synchronization, set all the

VTRs to 1 (ENA). (Refer to pages 14 and 19.)

202

ID SEL

For setting what ID information is to be

returned to the controller.

0000 OTHER

0001 DVCPRO

0002 ORIG

<Notes>

• For 0 (OTHER), the ID information of VTRs other than

DVCPRO models is set.

• Select 2 (ORIG) only when the VTR is connected to a

Panasonic controller (such as the AJ-A900, an

optional accessory).

• Select 1 (DVCPRO) or 2 (ORIG) if the 23/24 Hz mode

has been selected by system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ).

205

BAUD RATE

For setting the RS-232C data transfer speed

(baud rate).

0000 300

0001 600

0002 1200

0003 2400

0004 4800

0005 9600

207

STOP BIT

For setting the number of RS-232C stop bits.

(Unit: bits)

0000 1

0001 2

206

DATA

LENGTH

For setting the RS-232C data length.

(Unit: bits)

0000 7

0001 8

208

PARITY

For setting whether the RS-232C parity bit is

to be used and, if it is used, whether even or

odd parity is to apply.

0000 NON

The parity bit is not used.

0001 ODD

The parity bit is used with an odd parity.

0002 EVEN

The parity bit is used with an even parity.

No./Item Description of setting

209

RETURN ACK

For setting whether or not to return the ACK

code when a command is received from RS-

232C.

0000 OFF

:The ACK code is not returned.

0001 ON

:The ACK code is returned.

212

MASTER

PORT

For selecting the remote control connector

for controlling the slave machine when this

VTR is to be used as the master machine for

deck-to-deck operations.

0001 IN/OUT

:The IN/OUT connector is used.

0001 OUT

:The OUT connector is used.

<Note>

This setting takes effect only when the 9P button has

been set to LOCAL (LED off).

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<EDIT>

No./Item Description of setting

300

IN/OUT DEL

For selecting the operation to be performed when

an edit point has been set incorrectly (when the

OUT point comes before the IN point).

0000 MANU

Editing is not performed unless the illegal edit

point is cleared or set properly.

0001 AUTO

The edit point which had already been input is

cleared automatically.

301

NEGA FLASH

For selecting whether to show a negative display

(time code display area) when the IN point is

greater than the OUT point.

0000 OFF

A negative display is not shown.

0001 ON

A negative display is shown.

No./Item Description of setting

302

CONFI EDIT

For selecting whether to perform simultaneous

playback during editing.

0000 OFF

:Simultaneous playback is not

performed.

0001 ON

:Simultaneous playback is

performed.

<Note>

Simultaneous playback takes effect when TAPE is

selected as the F1 key setting on the

<HOME> menu. Refer to setup menu item No.140 as

well.

OUTPUT

303*1

AUD EDIT

For selecting how to connect the digital audio

edit IN points.

0000 CUT

:Cut processing

0001 FADE

:V-fade processing

304*1

AUD EDIT

OUT

For selecting how to connect the digital audio

edit OUT points.

0000 CUT

:Cut processing

0001 FADE

:V-fade processing

305

AUTO ENTRY

For selecting whether to register the IN points

using the PREROLL button in cases where

the IN points have not been registered.

0000 DIS

:The IN points are not

registered.

0001 ENA

:The IN points are registered.

306*1

CF ADJ SEL

For selecting the deck whose the color

framing is to be adjusted during deck-to-deck

editing.

0000 PLAYER

The player’s IN and OUT points are adjusted

(using the recorder as the reference).

0001 RECORD

The recorder’s IN and OUT points are adjusted

(using the player as the reference).

307

AFTER

CUE-UP

For selecting the VTR’s mode upon

completion of the cue-up operation.

0000 STOP

The VTR is set to the STOP mode.

0001 STILL

The VTR is set to the still picture (SHTL STILL)

mode.

0002 STILL2

The VTR is set to the still picture (VAR STILL)

mode.

308

VAR FWD

MAX

For setting the maximum speed of VAR FWD.

0000

4.9

:i4.9 times normal tape speed

0001 i2

:i2 times normal tape speed

(i1.85 times normal tape

speed for formats other than

DVCPRO HD-LP)

0002 i1

:i1 times normal tape speed

<Notes>

•At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase adjustments

cannot be conducted from the editing controller.

•Depending on the format used, the actual tape

running speed differs slightly from what is indicated

by the superimposed display.

310

JOG FWD

MAX

For setting the maximum speed of JOG FWD.

0000 i4.9

:i4.9 times normal tape speed

0001 i2

:i2 times normal tape speed

(i1.85 times normal tape

speed for formats other than

DVCPRO HD-LP)

0002 i1

:i1 times normal tape speed

<Notes>

At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase adjustments

cannot be conducted from the editing controller which

performs these adjustments by the JOG command.

311

JOG REV MAX

For setting the maximum speed of JOG REV.

0000 j4.9

:j4.9 times normal tape speed

0001 j2

:j2 times normal tape speed

(j1.85 times normal tape

speed for formats other than

DVCPRO HD-LP)

0002 j1

:j1 times normal tape speed

312

POSTROLL

For setting the postroll time.

Any time from 0 to 5 seconds can be set in 1-

second increments.

0000 0s

0001 1s

0002 2s

0003 3s

0004 4s

0005 5s

309

VAR REV MAX

For setting the maximum speed of VAR REV.

0000 j4.9

:j4.9 times normal tape speed

0001 j2

:j2 times normal tape speed

(j1.85 times normal tape

speed for formats other than

DVCPRO HD-LP)

0002 j1

:j1 times normal tape speed

<Note>

Depending on the format used, the actual tape running

speed differs slightly from what is indicated by the

superimposed display

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<EDIT> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

324*1

EDIT RPLCEC

As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s

CUE edit presets are set to ON or OFF

following the analog audio signals specified

by the editor or controller.

0000 N-DEF

Not set.

0001 CH1

The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.

0002 CH2

The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.

0003 CH1+2

The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are

followed.

320*1

EDIT RPLCE1

For setting the allocation of the channels for

the analog audio presets of a controller when

a controller without a function to control the

edit presets of the digital audio signals is

used to edit the digital audio signals of the

VTR.

The VTR’s CH1 edit presets are set to ON or

OFF following the analog audio signals specified

by the controller.

0000 N-DEF

Not set.

0001 CH1

The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.

0002 CH2

The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.

0003 CH1+2

The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are

followed.

321*1

EDIT RPLCE2

As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s

CH2 edit presets are set to ON or OFF

following the analog audio signals specified

by the controller.

0000 N-DEF

Not set.

0001 CH1

The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.

0002 CH2

The analog CH2 edit presets are followed

0003 CH1+2

The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are

followed.

322*1

EDIT RPLCE3

As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s

CH3 edit presets are set to ON or OFF

following the analog audio signals specified

by the controller.

0000 N-DEF

Not set.

0001 CH1

The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.

0002 CH2

The analog CH2 edit presets are followed

0003 CH1+2

The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are

followed.

323*1

EDIT RPLCE4

As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s

CH4 edit presets are set to ON or OFF

following the analog audio signals specified

by the controller.

0000 N-DEF

Not set.

0001 CH1

The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.

0002 CH2

The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.

0003 CH1+2

The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are

followed.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

The cumulative total standby time passed in the same location

increases at such times when the same material is repeatedly used

as is the case when programs are transmitted, for example.

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

401

SRC

PROTECT

For selecting the operation to be performed

when the tape protection mode is established

after the VTR has been left standing in the

STILL status in a search mode (JOG, VAR or

SHTL).

0000 STEP

:STEP FWD

0001 HALF

:Half-loading

0002 T-REL

:Tension release

<Notes>

•When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is

automatically transferred to the standby OFF (half-

loading) mode after it has been left standing in the

STILL status for a total of 30 minutes (or 1 minute in

the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).

•When, after tension release has been selected and

the VTR has been transferred to the tension release

mode, the VTR has been left standing in this mode

for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically transferred to

the standby OFF (half-loading) mode. However, in

the case of a DV or DVCAM tape, the transfer to the

tension release mode is inhibited, and the VTR

operates as if STEP FWD has been selected.

402

DRUM STDBY

For selecting whether the drum is to operate

in the standby OFF (half-loading) mode.

0000 OFF

:The drum stops rotating.

0001 ON

:The drum continues to rotate.

403

STOP

PROTECT

For selecting the operation to be performed

when the tape protection mode is established

after the VTR has been left standing in the

STOP mode.

0000 STEP

:STEP FWD

0001 HALF

:Half-loading

0002 T-REL

:Tension release

<Notes>

•When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is

automatically transferred to the standby OFF (half-

loading) mode after it has been left standing in the

STOP mode for a total of 30 minutes (or 1 minute in

the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).

•When, after tension release has been selected and

the VTR has been transferred to the tension release

mode, the VTR has been left standing in this mode

for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically transferred to

the standby OFF (half-loading) mode. However, in

the case of a DV or DVCAM tape, the transfer to the

tension release mode is inhibited, and the VTR

operates as if STEP FWD has been selected.

400

STILL TIMER

For selecting the duration of the time taken

after the VTR is left standing in the STOP or

search STILL mode (JOG, VAR or SHTL)

before the tape protection mode is

established.

(Units: s = seconds, min = minutes)

0000 0.5s

0001 5s

0002 10s

0003 20s

0004 30s

0005 40s

0006 50s

0007 1min

0008 2min

<Note>

When a DV or DVCAM tape is

used, the time is set to 10

seconds even when a setting of

2 (10s) or longer is selected.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

No./Item Description of setting

500*4

VITC BLANK

For selecting whether or not to output the

VITC signal at the positions selected by setup

menu items No.501 (VITC POS-1) and No.502

(VITC POS-2).

0000 BLANK

:The VITC signal is not output.

0001 THRU

:The VITC signal is output.

<Note>

Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.

501*4

VITC POS-1

For setting the position where the VITC signal

is to be inserted.

<59/60Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (SD)>

0000 10L 0000 7L

:: ::

0006 16L 0004 11L

:: ::

0010 20L 0015 22L

<Notes>

• The same line as the one selected by the setup menu

item No.502 (VITC POS-2) cannot be selected.

• Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.

505*1

TCG REGEN

For selecting the regeneration signal when

REGEN has been selected as the TCG (time

code generator) mode.

0000 TC&UB

Regeneration applies to both the time code

and user’s bit.

0001 TC

Regeneration applies only to the time code only.

0002 UB

Regeneration applies only to the user’s bit only.

506*1

REGEN MODE

For selecting the editing mode range when

the VTR is operating in the REGEN mode

while performing editing operations with

“AUTO” selected as the setup menu item

No.503 (TCG MODE) setting.

0000 AS&IN

Regeneration applies during assemble or

insert editing.

0001 ASSEM

Regeneration applies during assemble editing.

0002 INSRT

Regeneration applies during insert editing.

507*1

TC SOURCE

For selecting the time code to be used when

HD SDI or SD SDI has been selected as the

setup menu item No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL)

setting when an external time code is to be

used.

[When HD SDI has been selected]

0000 INT

The time code of the internal time code

generator is used.

0001 EXT_L

LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.

0002 SLTC

The LTC information added to the serial

signals which are input to HD SDI IN is used.

0003 SVITC

The VITC information added to the serial

signals which are input to HD SDI IN is used.

[When SD SDI has been selected]

0000 INT

The time code of the internal time code

generator is used.

0001 EXT_L

LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.

0002 VITC

The VITC information added to the serial

signals which are input to SD SDI IN is used.

<Note>

If the VIDEO IN SEL input selection is changed, the time

code is converted as shown below.

[HD_SDI] [SD_SDI]

INT ↔INT

EXT_L ↔EXT_L

SLTC ↔EXT_L

SVITC ↔VITC

502*4

VITC POS-2

For setting the position where the VITC signal

is to be inserted.

<59/60Hz> <50Hz, 25Hz (SD)>

0000 10L 0000 7L

:: ::

0008 18L 0006 13L

:: ::

0010 20L 0015 22L

<Notes>

• The same line as the one selected by the setup menu

item No.501 (VITC POS-1) cannot be selected.

• Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.

503*1

TCG MODE

For setting the synchronization of the internal

time code generator.

0000 REGEN

The time code reader is synchronized with the

time code which is read from the tape.

0001 PRE

Presetting is enabled at the operation panel or

by the remote controller.

0002 AUTO

The REGEN and PRE settings are

automatically switched in accordance with the

operation mode.

In the editing mode: REGEN is selected.

In all other modes: PRE is selected.

504*1

RUN MODE

For setting when the internal time code

generator is to advance depending on the

operation mode.

0000 REC

The time code generator is advanced during

recording.

0001 FREE

The time code generator is advanced while the

power is on regardless of which operation

mode is established.

No./Item Description of setting

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode

has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

setting.

*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode has

been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

513

VITC OUT

For selecting how to output the VITC which is

superimposed on the output video signal.

0000 SBC

In the playback mode, the time code recorded

in the SBC area is output.

0001 VAUX

In the playback mode, the time code recorded

in the VAUX area is output.

<Note>

The VITC information detected by the HD serial input is

automatically recorded in the VAUX area when the video

signals are recorded

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<TIME CODE> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting

514

HD EMBD

VITC

For selecting whether to superimpose the

VITC information on the HD serial output.

0000 OFF

The VITC information is not superimposed.

0001 ON

The VITC information is superimposed.

515

HD EMBD LTC

For selecting whether to superimpose the

LTC information on the HD serial output.

0000 OFF

The LTC information is not superimposed.

0001 ON

The LTC information ist superimposed.

516*1

TC OUT ADV

For selecting the processing to align the

phase of the time code which is output from

the TIME CODE OUT connector.

Normally, the time code which is output from the

TIME CODE OUT connector is aligned with the

output video and audio. If so required by the

connection with an external component or for

some other reason, this item makes it possible to

set the mode for aligning the phase with the

input.

0000 OFF

The phase alignment processing is not

conducted. The time code which is output

from the TIME CODE OUT connector is

aligned with the output video and audio.

0001 EDIT

During playback when an editing mode has

been selected and during editing, the time

code which is output from the TIME CODE

OUT connector is aligned with the input video

and audio. In all other modes, it is aligned with

the output video and audio

517*1

TCG OUT

For selecting whether to latch the TCG

display and LTC output during INPUT CHECK.

0000 MOMENT

The INPUT CHECK mode is established only

while the INPUT CHECK key is held down.

0001 LATCH

When the INPUT CHECK key is pressed, the

INPUT CHECK mode is established; even

when it is released, the mode remains

unchanged. The selection is released when

the video output is set to a mode other than the

EE mode.

SBC (sub code data) area:

This is an area on the helical track, and it is separate from the video

and audio data area. The time codes, recording dates and times

and other tape control information complying with SMPTE/EBU

standards are stored here. As with the conventional LTC (linear time

code), the time code can be read even during rewinding or fast

forwarding. It can also be read out when the tape has stopped.

VAUX (video auxiliary data) area:

This area is to be found in the video data area on the helical track.

The additional information relating to the video data is stored here.

508*1

BINARY GP

For setting how the user’s bit of the time code

generated by the TCG is to be used.

0000 000

NOT SPECIFIED (no character set specified)

0001 001

ISO CHARACTER (8-bit character set

complying with ISO646, ISO2022 standards)

0002 010

:UNASSIGNED 1 (undefined)

0003 011

:UNASSIGNED 2 (undefined)

0004 100

:UNASSIGNED 3 (undefined)

0005 101

:PAGE/LINE

0006 110

:UNASSIGNED 4 (undefined)

0007 111

:UNASSIGNED 5 (undefined)

509

PHASE CORR

For selecting whether to exercise phase

correction control over the LTC which is

generated by the TCG.

0000 OFF

Phase correction control is not exercised.

0001 ON

Phase correction control is exercised.

510*1

TCG CF FLAG

For selecting whether to set the CF flag of the

TCG to ON or OFF.

0000 OFF

:The CF flag is set to OFF.

0001 ON

:The CF flag is set to ON.

511*2

DF MODE

For selecting the drop frame or non-drop

frame mode for CTL and TCG.

0000 DF

:The drop frame mode is

selected.

0001 NDF

:The non-drop frame mode is

selected.

<Note>

This DF mode setting takes effect only when LOCAL is

selected or when “ENA” has been selected as the setup

menu item No.001 (LOCAL ENA) setting.

512*1

TC OUT REF

For switching the phase of the time code,

which is output from the TIME CODE OUT

connector, in response to the external LTC

input when a setting other than “INT” has

been selected for setup menu item No.507 (TC

SOURCE). (In EE mode only)

0000 VOUT

:The phase is aligned with the

output image.

0001 TC IN

:The phase is aligned with the

external time code input

No./Item Description of setting

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode

has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

setting.

*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD) or 50 Hz

mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM

FREQ) setting.

For accentuating the horizontal contours

during down-conversion and line conversion

(1080i <> 720p).

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1. 2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<VIDEO>

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

601*1

VIDEO INT SG

For selecting the type of internal signal.

0000

100%CB

A 100% color bar signal is selected.

0001 75

A 75% color bar signal is selected.

0002 SMPTE

An SMPTE color bar signal is selected.

0003 ARIB

An ARIB color bar signal is selected.

0004 MB

A multiburst signal is selected.

0005 RAMP

A ramp signal is selected.

0006 BLACK

A black signal is selected.

0007 PLL

A PLL signal is selected.

0008 EQ

An EQ signal is selected.

600*1

VIDEO IN SEL

For selecting the video signal which is to be input.

0000 INT SG

The internal signal selected by the VIDEO INT

SG item is generated.

0001 HDSDI

The serial video signal which has been input to the

HD SDI IN connector is selected.

0002 SDTI

:(In 59/60 Hz mode)

The compressed IF signal which has been input to

the SDTI IN connector is selected. (This setting

does not appear when the AJ-YAC15P optional

board has not been installed.)

0002 SD SDI

The serial video signal which has been input to the

SD SDI IN connector is selected. (This setting does

not appear when the AJ-UC1700G optional board

has not been installed.)

602*1

SDI IN MODE

For selecting how to process the serial input.

0000 DR OFF

The 8 higher bits after rounding up

the 2 lowest bits are recorded.

0001 DR ON

The signal with 8 higher bits, obtained

by dynamic rounding, is recorded.

603

V-MUTE SEL

For selecting whether to mute the video output

signals if LOW RF has been detected during

playback.

0000 N MUTE

:The signals are not muted.

(They are frozen.)

0001 GRAY

The signals are muted with gray.

0002 BLACK

The signals are muted with black.

0003 NOISE

The signals are muted with noise.

606

SD MONI O

SEL

For selecting the SD SDI or MONITOR output

signal.

0000 MONI

:: The MONITOR signal is output.

0001 SDI

:The same video signal as the

one output from the SD SDI

OUT1 connector is output

<Note>

When 1 (SDI) is selected, the time code and other

information are not superimposed on the display.

604*1

FREEZE SEL

For selecting the freeze mode of the still

pictures and slow playback mode.

0000 FIELD

:Field freeze, field slow

0000 FRAME

:Frame freeze, frame slow

605*1

INTERPOLATE

During field slow playback, vertical interpolation is

conducted automatically to minimize the up/down

movement of the playback pictures. However, this

setting enables the interpolation operation to be

forcibly set to OFF.

0000 OFF

The interpolation is forcibly set to OFF.

0001 AUTO

During slow playback, the interpolation

is automatically set to ON.

620*4

DOWNCON

MODE

For selecting the picture frame during down-

conversion.

0000 FIT_V

:Side cut mode

0001 FIT_H

:Letter box mode

0002 FIT_HV

:Squeeze mode

0003 14:9

:Semi letter box 14:9

0004 13:9

:Semi letter box 13:9

621*5

UPCON MODE

For selecting the picture frame during up-

conversion.

0000 FIT_V

:Side panel mode

0001 FIT_H

:Top and bottom cut in vertical

direction

0002 FIT_HV

:Stretch mode

622

D/C RESP

For selecting the horizontal frequency band

during down-conversion and line conversion

(1080i <> 720p).

0000 WIDE

0001 STD

623

D/C RESP

For selecting the vertical frequency band

during down-conversion and line conversion

(1080i <> 720p).

0000 WIDE

0001 STD

624*5

U/C RESP

For selecting the horizontal frequency band

during up-conversion and line conversion.

0000 STD

0001

NARROW

625*5

U/C RESP

For selecting the vertical frequency band

during up-conversion and line conversion.

0000 STD

0001

NARROW

626

D/C ENH

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode

has been selected as the system menu item.

*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode has

been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*5: This item is not displayed when the 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been

selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<VIDEO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

627

D/C ENH V

For accentuating the vertical contours during

down-conversion and line conversion

(1080i <> 720p).

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1.2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

628*5

U/C ENH H

For accentuating the horizontal contours

during up-conversion.

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1.2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

629*5

U/C ENH V

For accentuating the vertical contours during

up-conversion.

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1.2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

630*2

1080i>HD_

OUT

For selecting the HD output signal format

during 1080i tape playback or in the 1080i EE

mode. (See table below.)

0000 1080i

0001 720p

0002 1080i

631*2

1080i>SD_

OUT

For selecting the SD output signal format

during 1080i tape playback or in the 1080i EE

mode. (See table below.)

0000 480i

0001 --------

0002 480p

0000 1080i

(no conversion)

480i (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

720p (line-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

1080i

(no conversion)

480p* (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

0001

0002

HD SDI OUT SD SDI OUT

Output connectors

VIDEO OUT

632*2

720p>HD_

OUT

For selecting the HD output signal format

during 720p tape playback or in the 720p EE

mode. (See table below.)

0000 1080i

0001 720p

0002 720p

634*2

480p>HD_

OUT

For selecting the HD output signal format

during 480p tape (DVCPRO50P) playback.

(See table below.)

0000 1080i

0001 720p

0002 ---------

635*2

480p>SD_

OUT

For selecting the SD output signal format

during 480p tape (DVCPRO50P) playback.

(See table below.)

0000 480p

0001 480p

0002 480i

633*2

720p>SD_

OUT

For selecting the SD output signal format

during 720p tape playback or in the 720p EE

mode. (See table below.)

0000 --------

0001 480i

0002 480p

0000 1080i (line-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

720p

(no conversion)

480i (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

720p

(no conversion)

480p* (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

0001

0002

HD SDI OUT SD SDI OUT

Output connectors

VIDEO OUT

0000 1080i (up-

converted output)

480p*

(no conversion)

480i (down-

converted output)

720p (up-

converted output)

480p*

(no conversion)

480i (down-

converted output)

Muted 480i (down-

converted output)

480i (down-

converted output)

0001

0002

<Note>

During SD tape playback, the VTR cannot be operated in the 60

Hz mode.

HD SDI OUT SD SDI OUT

Output connectors

VIDEO OUT

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

<Note>

There is no output in the 60 Hz

mode.

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)

or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*2:This item is not displayed when the 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has

been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

setting.

* Setup menu item No.107 and INPUT CHECK do not function,

and the same signal as this signal line is output.

<Note>

There is no output in the 60 Hz

mode.

Setup menus

<Note>

Setup menu items No.638, 639, 640, 641 and 642 do not function

when the AJ-UC1700G optional board has not been installed.

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)

*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)

<VIDEO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

637*2

480i>SD_

OUT

For selecting the SD output signal format

during 480i tape (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV or

DVCAM) playback. (See table below.)

0000 480i

0001 480i

0002 480p

636*2

480i>HD_

OUT

For selecting the HD output signal format

during 480i tape (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV or

DVCAM) playback. (See table below.)

0000 1080i

0001 720p

0002 ---------

0000 1080i (up-

converted output)

480i

(no conversion)

480i

(no conversion)

720p (up-

converted output)

480i

(no conversion)

480i

(no conversion)

Muted 480p* (up-

converted output)

480i

(no conversion)

0001

0002

HD SDI OUT SD SDI OUT

Output connectors

VIDEO OUT

638*1

IN U/C

MODE

For selecting the up-conversion picture frame

when SD SDI input signals are supplied.

0000 FIT_V

:Side panel mode

0001 FIT_H:

Top and bottom cut in vertical

direction

0002 FIT_HV

Stretch mode

639*1

I U/C RESP H

For selecting the horizontal frequency band

during the up-conversion of SD SDI input

signals.

0000 STD

0001 NARROW

640*1

I U/C RESP V

For selecting the vertical frequency band

during the up-conversion of SD SDI input

signals.

0000 STD

0001 NARROW

642*2

I U/C ENH

For accentuating the vertical contours during

up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1.2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

650

STYLE

0000* CMPNT*

:Level adjustment mode for the

component style

0001 CMPST

:Level adjustment mode for the

composite style

*The asterisk denotes the factory setting for

AJ-HD1700E.

For adjusting the black level of the HD SDI

output.

50 j10.0%

150 0.0%

250 i10.0%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

656

BK LVL

(HD)*UP

655

Pr LVL (HD)*UP

For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI

output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

651*3

HUE STYLE

(SD)*DW

For selecting the rotational axis of the chroma

phase adjustment.

0000 Pb-Pr

:The axis rotates in a perfect

circle on the SDI (component

style) vectorscope.

0001 U-V

:The axis rotates in a perfect

circle on the analog (composite

style) vectorscope.

653

Y LVL (HD)*UP

For adjusting the Y level of the HD SDI output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

654

Pb LVL

(HD)*UP

For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI

output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

<Note>

During SD tape playback, the VTR cannot be operated in the 60

Hz mode.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)

or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)

mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

* Setup menu item No.107 and INPUT CHECK do not function,

and the same signal as this signal line is output.

641*2

I U/C ENH

For accentuating the horizontal contours

during up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.

0000 0dB

0001 i0.7dB

0002 i1dB

0003 i1.2dB

0004 i1.5dB

0005 i2dB

<Note>

The numbers on the superimposed

display are approximations only.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted

output)

<VIDEO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

663

C LEVEL

For adjusting the chroma level of the HD SDI

output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

660

Pr LVL

(SD)*DW

For adjusting the PR level of the SD SDI

output and VIDEO output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

661

BK LVL

(SD)*DW

For adjusting the black level of the SD SDI

output and VIDEO output.

50 j10.0%

150 0.0%

250

10.0%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPST” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

662

V LEVEL

For adjusting the video level of the HD SDI

output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i6 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

2000 200.0%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPST” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

659

Pb LVL

(SD)*DW

For adjusting the PB level of the SD SDI

output and VIDEO output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

670

BRIGHT

For adjusting the brightness of the LCD

monitor on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

671

R-BRIGHT

For adjusting the brightness (red) of the LCD

monitor on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

672

B-BRIGHT

For adjusting the brightness (blue) of the LCD

monitor on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

673

CONTRAST

For adjusting the contrast of the LCD monitor

on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

674

R-CONTRAST

For adjusting the contrast (red) of the LCD

monitor on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

665

SETUP LVL

(BK LVL*)

For adjusting the setup (black*) level of the

HD SDI output, SD SDI output and VIDEO

output.

(j10% to i10%)

10.0%

150 0.0%

250

10.0%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPST” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

658

Y LVL (SD)*DW

For adjusting the Y level of the SD SDI output

and VIDEO output.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i3 dB)

0000 0.0%

1000 100.0%

1413 141.3%

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPNT” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

664

HUE

(C PHASE*)

For adjusting the chroma phase of the HD SDI

output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.

(Approx. j30xto i30x)

0000

31.0

0062 0.0

0124 31.0

<Note>

If 0 (50) or 3 [25 (HD)] or 4 [25 (SD)] has been selected

as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

setting:

• The HD SDI output cannot be adjusted.

• The SD SDI output and video output can be adjusted

only when an SD format tape is being created.

<Note>

This setting takes effect when

“CMPST” has been selected as the

setup menu item No.650 setting.

* This is the name of the menu item for AJ-HD1700E.

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)

*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)

No./Item Description of setting

Setup menus

<VIDEO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting

680*2

CC (F1)

BLANK*DW

For selecting ON or OFF for the closed

caption signals in the first field.

0000 BLANK

The signals are forcibly blanked.

0001 THRU

:The signals are not blanked.

681*2

CC (F2)

BLANK*DW

For selecting ON or OFF for the closed

caption signals in the second field.

0000 BLANK

The signals are forcibly blanked.

0001 THRU

:The signals are not blanked.

682

VO SETUP

(HD)*UP

(This menu is

not displayed for

AJ-HD1700E.)

This selects the composite output signal in HD mode.

0000 THRU:

The signal is output with no

setup added.

0001 ADD22L

:The signal is output from line

22 with a 7.5% setup added.

0002 ADD21L

:The signal is output from line 21

with a 7.5% setup added.

0002 ADD20L

:The signal is output from line 20

with a 7.5% setup added.

683

VO SETUP

(SD)*DW

(This menu is

not displayed for

AJ-HD1700E.)

This selects the composite output signal in SD mode.

0000 THRU

:The signal is output with no

setup added.

0001 ADD22L

:The signal is output from line

22 with a 7.5% setup added.

0002 ADD21L

:The signal is output from line

21 with a 7.5% setup added.

0002 ADD20L

:The signal is output from line

20 with a 7.5% setup added.

676*3

BLK CLIP

This function clips the signals below the

pedestal level for SD SDI OUT and composite

OUT Y (luminance) signals.

0000 OFF

:The signals are not clipped.

0001 ON

:The signals are clipped.

675

B-CONTRAST

For adjusting the contrast (blue) of the LCD

monitor on the front panel.

0j127

127 0

254 127

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)

or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)

mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD)

mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting

688*2

CC REC

For selecting whether to record the closed

caption signals which are superimposed on

the SD input signal.

0000 OFF

:The closed caption signals are

not recorded on the tape.

0001 ON

The closed caption signals are recorded on the

tape if they are superimposed on the SD input

signal. In this case, they are blanked, up-

converted and then recorded.

<Notes>

• When SDTI has been selected as the input signal, the

closed caption data superimposed on the

compressed input signals is recorded on the tape in

its original form regardless of this menu item’s setting.

• Setup menu item No.688 does not function when the

AJ-UC1700G optional board has not been installed.

695*1

BLANK LINE

For selecting ON or OFF for blanking for the

vertical blanking period of the video signals

during SD tape playback.

0000 BLANK

All the lines are forcibly blanked.

0001 THRU

None of the lines are blanked.

0002 MANU

Blanking ON or OFF is selected on a line-by-

line basis.

<Note>

When 2 (MANU) is set and the button is

pressed, the display transfers to the submenu screen

where the ON or OFF can be set for each line. Press

the button again to return the display from the

submenu screen.

SHIFT

Submenu screen <50Hz>

Submenu screen <59/60 Hz>

LINE 11&274

LINE 22&285

0000 BLANK

:The lines are forcibly blanked.

0001 THRU

:The lines are not blanked.

LINE 7&320

LINE 22&335

0000 BLANK

:The lines are forcibly blanked.

0001 THRU

:The lines are not blanked

686*2

CCR MODE

(SD)*DW

For selecting the cross color processing

during playback.

0000 OFF

:The cross color is output as is.

0001 ON

The cross color can be reduced.

684

EDH (SD)*DW

For selecting whether to superimpose EDH on

the serial output signals.

0000 OFF

:EDH is not superimposed.

0001 ON

:EDH is superimposed.

685*2

ESR MODE

(SD)*DW

For selecting the operation mode for edge

subcarrier reduction (ESR) in the playback circuit.

0000 OFF

:ESR is forcibly set to OFF.

0001 AUTO

:ESR is automatically set to ON

or OFF in accordance with the

VTR operation.

687*4

SDI INDEX 0

*DW

For selecting whether to superimpose the VIDEO

INDEX signal on the SD SDI output signal.

0000 OFF

:The VIDEO INDEX signal is not

superimposed on the SD SDI

output signal.

0001 ON

The VIDEO INDEX signal is

superimposed on the SD SDI

output signal.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<AUDIO>

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

700*1

CH1 IN LV

For selecting the audio input (CH1) reference

level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

701*1

CH2 IN LV

For selecting the audio input (CH2) reference

level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

702*1

CH3 IN LV

For selecting the audio input (CH3) reference

level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

703*1

CH4 IN LV

For selecting the audio input (CH4) reference

level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

704*1

CUE IN LV

For selecting the CUE input reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

0003 j60dB

705

CH1 OUT LV

For selecting the audio output (CH1)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

706

CH2 OUT LV

For selecting the audio output (CH2)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

707

CH3 OUT LV

For selecting the audio output (CH3)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

708

CH4 OUT LV

For selecting the audio output (CH4)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

711

MONIR OUT

For selecting the audio monitor output (Rch)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

712

MONI OUT

For selecting the audio monitor output UNITY

or VARIABLE level.

0000 UNITY

:The signals are output at a

fixed level.

0001 VAR

:The signal output is coupled

with the headphones volume

control.

713*1

CH1 IN SEL

For selecting the CH1 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN SEL 12).

714*1

CH2 IN SEL

For selecting the CH2 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN SEL 12).

715*1

CH3 IN SEL

For selecting the CH3 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN SEL 34).

716*1

CH4 IN SEL

For selecting the CH4 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN SEL 34).

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

709

CUE OUT LV

For selecting the CUE output reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

710

MONIL OUT

For selecting the audio monitor output (Lch)

reference level.

0000 4dB

0001 0dB

0002 j20dB

717*1

CH5 IN SEL

For selecting the CH5 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

(CH1 input)

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN SEL 56).

718*1

CH6 IN SEL

For selecting the CH6 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

(CH2 input)

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN SEL 56).

719*1

CH7 IN SEL

For selecting the CH7 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

(CH3 input)

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN SEL 78).

720*1

CH8 IN SEL

For selecting the CH8 input signal.

0000 INT SG

:The internal signal is selected.

0001 DIGI

:Digital input signals are

selected.

0002 ANA

:Analog input signals are

selected.

(CH4 input)

<Note>

When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is

selected for the input is determined by the setting

selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN SEL 78).

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<AUDIO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

721*1

D IN SEL12

For selecting the CH1 and CH2 digital input

signals.

0000 AES

:AES/EBU

0001 SDI

:Serial

722*1

D IN SEL34

For selecting the CH3 and CH4 digital input

signals.

0000 AES

:AES/EBU

0001 SDI

:Serial

723*1

D IN SEL56

For selecting the CH5 and CH6 digital input

signals.

0000 AES

:AES/EBU

0001 SDI

:Serial

724*1

D IN SEL78

For selecting the CH7 and CH8 digital input

signals.

0000 AES

:AES/EBU

0001 SDI

:Serial

725*1

REC CH1

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH1 track.

0000 CH1

:Audio input CH1 signals

0001 CH2

:Audio input CH2 signals

0002 CH3

:Audio input CH3 signals

0003 CH4

:Audio input CH4 signals

0004 CH1+2

:Audio input CH1 and CH2

mixed signals

0005 CH3+4

:Audio input CH3 and CH4

mixed signals

726*1

REC CH2

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH2 track.

0000 CH1

:Audio input CH1 signals

0001 CH2

:Audio input CH2 signals

0002 CH3

:Audio input CH3 signals

0003 CH4

:Audio input CH4 signals

0004 CH1+2

:Audio input CH1 and CH2

mixed signals

0005 CH3+4

:Audio input CH3 and CH4

mixed signals

727*1

REC CH3

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH3 track.

0000 CH1

:Audio input CH1 signals

0001 CH2

:Audio input CH2 signals

0002 CH3

:Audio input CH3 signals

0003 CH4

:Audio input CH4 signals

0004 CH1+2

:Audio input CH1 and CH2

mixed signals

0005 CH3+4

:Audio input CH3 and CH4

mixed signals

728*1

REC CH4

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH4 track.

0000 CH1

:Audio input CH1 signals

0001 CH2

:Audio input CH2 signals

0002 CH3

:Audio input CH3 signals

0003 CH4

:Audio input CH4 signals

0004 CH1+2

:Audio input CH1 and CH2

mixed signals

0005 CH3+4

:Audio input CH3 and CH4

mixed signals

729*1

REC CH5

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH5 track.

0000 CH5

:Audio input CH5 signals

0001 CH6

:Audio input CH6 signals

0002 CH7

:Audio input CH7 signals

0003 CH8

:Audio input CH8 signals

0004 CH5+6

:Audio input CH5 and CH6

mixed signals

0005 CH7+8

:Audio input CH7 and CH8

mixed signals

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

100

733*1

REC CUE

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the CUE track.

0000 CUE

:CUE IN

0001 CH1

:Audio input CH1 signals

0002 CH2

:Audio input CH2 signals

0003 CH3

:Audio input CH3 signals

0004 CH4

:Audio input CH4 signals

0005 CH5

:Audio input CH5 signals

0006 CH6

:Audio input CH6 signals

0007 CH7

:Audio input CH7 signals

0008 CH8

:Audio input CH8 signals

0009 CH1+2

Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals

0010 CH3+4

Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals

0011 CH5+6

Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals

0012 CH7+8

Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals

0013 CH1j8

Audio input CH1 to CH8 mixed signals

734*1

PB FADE

For selecting how to process the audio edit

points (IN points and OUT points) during

playback.

0000 AUTO

:The status established during

recording is followed.

0001 CUT

:Forcibly cut

0002 FADE

:Forcibly faded

735

HD EMBD

AUD

For selecting whether to superimpose the

audio data on the HD serial output.

0000 OFF

The audio data is not

superimposed.

0001 ON

The audio data is superimposed.

736

SD EMBD AUD

For selecting whether to superimpose the

audio data on the SD serial output.

0000 OFF

The audio data is not

superimposed.

0001 ON

The audio data is superimposed.

737

MONI MIX

For selecting the mixed signals for the

headphone monitor (Lch and/or Rch).

0000 OFF

:Neither the Lch nor Rch signals

are mixed.

0001 L

:Only the Lch signals are mixed.

0002 R

:Only the Rch signals are mixed.

0003 L/R

:Both the Lch and Rch signals

are mixed.

<Notes>

• At the OFF setting, the signals to be output to monitor

L (or monitor R) are switched to CH1, CH2, CH3 and

so on each time the “L” or “R” button is pressed. The

selected signals are displayed below the audio level

meter.

• At the L, R or L/R setting, the signals of a multiple

number of channels can be mixed and output. When

the number key corresponding to the channel whose

signals are to be monitored is pressed while the “L”

(or “R”) button is held down, that channel is selected.

The selected channel is displayed below the audio

level meter. (Alternatively, the same steps can be

taken to de-select a channel which has already been

selected.) However, only up to 2 channels among the

CH1-CH4 channels and up to 2 channels among the

CH5 to CH8 channels can be selected.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<AUDIO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

730*1

REC CH6

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH6 track.

0000 CH5

:Audio input CH5 signals

0001 CH6

:Audio input CH6 signals

0002 CH7

:Audio input CH7 signals

0003 CH8

:Audio input CH8 signals

0004 CH5+6

:Audio input CH5 and CH6

mixed signals

0005 CH7+8

:Audio input CH7 and CH8

mixed signals

731*1

REC CH7

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH7 track.

0000 CH5

:Audio input CH5 signals

0001 CH6

:Audio input CH6 signals

0002 CH7

:Audio input CH7 signals

0003 CH8

:Audio input CH8 signals

0004 CH5+6

:Audio input CH5 and CH6

mixed signals

0005 CH7+8

:Audio input CH7 and CH8

mixed signals

732*1

REC CH8

For selecting the input signals to be recorded

on the audio CH8 track.

0000 CH5

:Audio input CH5 signals

0001 CH6

:Audio input CH6 signals

0002 CH7

:Audio input CH7 signals

0003 CH8

:Audio input CH8 signals

0004 CH5+6

:Audio input CH5 and CH6

mixed signals

0005 CH7+8

:Audio input CH7 and CH8

mixed signals

738

CH1 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH1 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

101

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<AUDIO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

739

CH2 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH2 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

740

CH3 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH3 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

745

CH8 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH8 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

741

CH4 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH4 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

742

CH5 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH5 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

743

CH6 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH6 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

746

MONI CH SEL

For selecting the monitor output.

0000 MANU

The signal selected by the MONITOR SELECT

button is output.

0001 AUTO

The PCM audio signal is output in the j1.0k

to i2.0kspeed range; the CUE signal is

automatically output at all other speeds.

0002 PCM

The PCM audio signal is output in the j32kto

i32kspeed range.

<Notes>

• When “AUTO” is selected and a tape in any format

except DVCPRO HD-LP is played back, the PCM

audio signals are output in the -1.0kto +1.1kspeed

range.

• This setting takes effect when the L and R MONITOR

SELECT switches on the VTR’s front panel have

selected a channel from CH1 to CH8.

(If they have selected CUE, the CUE signal is output

at all speeds regardless of this menu item’s setting.)

747

MON AUTO

SEL

For selecting the channel for the monitor

output to be switched to CUE.

When a setting other than “MANU” has been

selected for setup menu item No.746 (MONI CH

SEL), the CUE signal is automatically output to

the monitor output in accordance with the

operation mode, and the monitor channel to be

switched to CUE is selected automatically.

0000 L/R

:The CUE signal is output both

to the Lch and Rch.

0001 L

:The CUE signal is output to the

Lch only.

0002 R

:The CUE signal is output to the

Rch only.

744

CH7 CUE SEL

For selecting the CH7 output status of the

main signal line in the search mode.

0000 OFF

The CUE signal is not output.

0001 ON

The CUE signal is output.

<Note>

For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio

outputs in the search mode” on page 103.

748

MONI SEL INH

For selecting whether to enable or inhibit the

operation of the MONITOR SELECT button on

the front panel.

0000 OFF

:The button’s operation is

enabled.

0001 ON

:The button’s operation is

inhibited.

0002 ON1

:In the FULL display mode,

operation is prohibited; in the

FINE display mode only,

operation is enabled.

<Note>

Whether to enable or inhibit the button’s operation can

be selected for channels whose signals have not been

mixed by the setup menu item No.737 (MONI MIX)

setting.

102

749*1

AUDIO PB VR

For selecting whether the playback level

adjustment controls are to function in the EE

mode when INT SG has been selected on the

<AUDIO> function menu.

0000 DIS

:The INT SG output level is fixed

at the UNITY level.

0001 ENA

:The INT SG output level can be

varied using the playback level

adjustment controls.

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<AUDIO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

750

ANA CH1 SEL

For selecting the signal to be output to analog

output CH1.

0000 CH1

:The CH1 signal is output.

0001 CH5

:The CH5 signal is output

751

ANA CH2 SEL

For selecting the signal to be output to analog

output CH2.

0000 CH2

:The CH2 signal is output.

0001 CH6

:The CH6 signal is output.

752

ANA CH3 SEL

For selecting the signal to be output to analog

output CH3.

0000 CH3

:The CH3 signal is output.

0001 CH7

:The CH7 signal is output.

753

ANA CH4 SEL

For selecting the signal to be output to analog

output CH4.

0000 CH4

:The CH4 signal is output.

0001 CH8

:The CH8 signal is output.

754

SD SDI CH1

For selecting the audio CH1 signal to be

superimposed onto the SD SDI output.

0000 CH1

:The CH1 signal is output.

0001 CH2

:The CH2 signal is output.

0002 CH3

:The CH3 signal is output.

0003 CH4

:The CH4 signal is output.

0004 CH5

:The CH5 signal is output.

0005 CH6

:The CH6 signal is output.

0006 CH7

:The CH7 signal is output.

0007 CH8

:The CH8 signal is output.

757

SD SDI CH4

For selecting the audio CH4 signal to be

superimposed onto the SD SDI output

0000 CH1

:The CH1 signal is output.

0001 CH2

:The CH2 signal is output.

0002 CH3

:The CH3 signal is output.

0003 CH4

:The CH4 signal is output.

0004 CH5

:The CH5 signal is output.

0005 CH6

:The CH6 signal is output.

0006 CH7

:The CH7 signal is output.

0007 CH8

:The CH8 signal is output.

758

JOG PROC

For selecting how to process the digital audio

output slow signals in the JOG, VAR or SHTL

mode.

0000 OFF

The sound without having the digital audio

output slow signals processed is output even

when the STILL mode is established.

0001 ON

The sound after having the digital audio output

slow signals processed is output.

759

DV PB ATT

For selecting the audio output level during DV

format playback.

0000 OFF

The audio output level is not attenuated.

0001 ON

The audio output level is attenuated.

760*1

REC PT MUTE

For selecting whether to mute the sound at

the joins between recordings during DV or

DVCAM format playback.

0000 OFF

:The sound is not muted.

0001 ON

:The sound is muted.

761*1

AUDIO INT SG

For selecting the type of internal signal.

0000 TONE

:A sine wave signal is selected.

0001 SILNCE

:A silent signal is selected.

755

SD SDI CH2

For selecting the audio CH2 signal to be

superimposed onto the SD SDI output

0000 CH1

:The CH1 signal is output.

0001 CH2

:The CH2 signal is output.

0002 CH3

:The CH3 signal is output.

0003 CH4

:The CH4 signal is output.

0004 CH5

:The CH5 signal is output.

0005 CH6

:The CH6 signal is output.

0006 CH7

:The CH7 signal is output.

0007 CH8

:The CH8 signal is output.

*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

756

SD SDI CH3

For selecting the audio CH3 signal to be

superimposed onto the SD SDI output

0000 CH1

:The CH1 signal is output.

0001 CH2

:The CH2 signal is output.

0002 CH3

:The CH3 signal is output.

0003 CH4

:The CH4 signal is output.

0004 CH5

:The CH5 signal is output.

0005 CH6

:The CH6 signal is output.

0006 CH7

:The CH7 signal is output.

0007 CH8

:The CH8 signal is output.

762

AUD RATE

CON

This item enables signals to be recorded and

played back without passing them through

the rate converter in the audio input/output

section (without engaging the digital filter).

0000 OFF

The signals are recorded and played back

without passing them through the rate

converter.

0001 ON

The signals are recorded and played back after

passing them through the rate converter.

<Notes>

•ON/OFF control is exercised at the same time for

both recording and playback. It cannot be set

differently for recording or playback.

•ON/OFF control is exercised at the same time for

CH1 to CH8. ON or OFF cannot be set

independently for each channel.

•When the rate converter is set to OFF, the video input

signals and AES (EBU) input signals must be

synchronized. Moreover, the video input signals and

reference signal selected by OUT REF must also be

synchronized. (Noise may occur if these signals are

not synchronized.)

•In the 60 Hz mode, noise may occur if OFF is set for

the rate converter.

103

Setup menus

<AUDIO> (continued)

No./Item Description of setting No./Item Description of setting

763

METER

SCALE

(This menu is

not displayed for

AJ-HD1700E.)

For selecting the scale display of the audio

level meter.

0000 PEAK_0

[The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the

maximum level.

0001 REF_0

The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the

reference level.

Audio outputs in the search mode

The table below lists the signals which are output to the monitor and main signal line and which are determined by how the settings of menu

items No.738 to No.745, and No.746 and No.747 are combined.

791

CUE PB VOL

For adjusting the playback level of the CUE

audio signal.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i12 dB)

0032 16

0016 0

0000

*3: During fast forwarding or rewinding, the CUE signal is output

automatically.

*4: During fast forwarding or rewinding, this signal is muted.

*5: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD

or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25

(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

L/R

CUE*2

PCM*1

CUE*2

PCM*1

CUE*2

CUE*2CUE*2

CUE*2PCM*1

PCM*1

PCM*4

CUE*2

PCM*3

PCM*4

PCM*3

AUTO

738 CH1 CUE SEL:

745 CH8 CUE SEL

OFF

MANU

AUTO

PCM

MANU

L/R

PC*1PCM*1

CUE*2

PCM*1

PCM*3PCM*3

PCM*1

CUE*2

PCM*1

CUE*2

PCM*1

PCM*1PCM*1

PCM*4PCM*4

PCM*1PCM*1

PCM*3

PCM

746

MONI CH

SEL

747

MON AUTO

SEL

Monitor output Main signal line output

CH1/CH3/CH5/CH7Lch Rch CH2/CH4/CH6/CH8

<Notes>

*1: The PCM audio output is muted if the tape is played back at a

speed in the j1.0kto i2.0krange (or at a speed in the j1.0k

to i1.1krange for a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP).

*2: In the case of the CUE audio output, the PCM signals are output

if the tape is played back at a speed in thejj1.0kto i2.0k

range (or at a speed in the -1.0kto +1.1krange for a format

other than DVCPRO HD-LP).

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

790*5

CUE REC VOL

For adjusting the recording level of the CUE

audio signal.

(j¶ to 0 dB to i12 dB)

0032 16

0016 0

0000

<Note>

This item is not displayed

when the 23/24 Hz mode has

been selected as the system

menu item No.25 (SYSTEM

FREQ) setting.

104

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

<MENU>

No./Item Description of setting

A02

P. ON LOAD

This VTR is equipped with VTR MEMORY

for storing the current settings (*1) and VTR

MEMORY to for backing up VTR

MEMORY . The data of a selected VTR

MEMORY to can be loaded into VTR

MEMORY and operation started on the

basis of this data when the power is turned

on.

0000 OFF

Operation is started using the previous

settings.

0001 USER1

The VTR MEMORY data is loaded and

operation started on the basis of this data.

0002 USER2

The VTR MEMORY data is loaded and

operation started on the basis of this data.

0003 USER3

The VTR MEMORY data is loaded and

operation started on the basis of this data.

0004 USER4

The VTR MEMORY data is loaded and

operation started on the basis of this data.

*1: The term “settings” here denotes all the settings of the setup

menus, what is registered in the PF1/PF2 menus, and the

contents of some of the function buttons.

When the VTR is to be connected to a Dolby-E encoder/decoder for recording or playing back Dolby-E data, set

the audio input and output levels to UNITY, and select the following setup menu item settings.

<Notes>

• Dolby-E data cannot be recorded or played back in

the 60 Hz mode.

• Adjust the timing with the video signals to cover the

time taken by the Dolby-E component for

encoding/decoding outside the VTR.

• Set the bit depth of the Dolby-E encoder/decoder to

16 bits.

• Noise will be output from the ANALOG AUDIO OUT

connectors of the channels through which the

Dolby-E data is passing.

• The audio level meter will deflect beyond the range

of its markings for those channels through which

the Dolby-E data is passing.

• Noise will be output when a tape on which Dolby-E

data has been recorded is played back in the JOG

or VAR mode.

* Dolby and the Double D symbol Îare trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

No.303 AUD EDIT IN = CUT

No.304 AUD EDIT OUT = CUT

No.725 REC CH1 = CH1

No.726 REC CH2 = CH2

No.727 REC CH3 = CH3

No.728 REC CH4 = CH4

No.729 REC CH5 = CH5

No.730 REC CH6 = CH6

No.731 REC CH7 = CH7

No.732 REC CH8 = CH8

No.734 PB FADE = CUT

No.758 JOG PROC = OFF

No.762 AUD RATE CON = OFF

105

Setup menus

Follow the steps below to switch the system frequency (59/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD) or 25 Hz(SD)).

1Following the procedure for the <SETUP

MENU/SYSTEM MENU> (page 60) to change the

system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.

2Press (SET) to enter the setting, and after the

function menu shown on the time code display area

has been cleared, the following message

appears.

3To make the setting entered in step 2 valid, press

the button while holding down the button.

The system is restarted, and the VTR starts

operating in the selected mode.

FENT

4To cancel the setting entered in step 2, press the

button while holding down the button.

The above message is cleared, and after the

changed setting has been restored to the original

system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,

operation returns to the SYSTEM menu operation

screen.

<Note>

If the system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting

has been changed while a cassette is inserted in the

VTR, the cassette is automatically ejected.

The same procedure as above is also followed when

the system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting has

been changed by loading the data from an IC card in

accordance with the <CARD> procedure (page 69).

Note that even if the change being made to the system

menu item No. 25 setting is cancelled, other system

menu items affected by the change will be updated, as

will the associated file names.

SHIFT

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

No.25

SYSTEM

FREQ Format enabling recording Format enabling playback Sync signals

50/60

1080/59.94i (HD_LP)

1080/60.00i (HD_LP)

720/59.94p (HD_LP)

720/60.00p (HD_LP)

1080/59.94i (HD_LP, HD_SP)

1080/60i (HD_LP, HD_SP)

720/59.94p (HD_LP, HD_SP)

720/60.00p (HD_LP, HD_SP)

480/59.94p (480p)

480/59.94i (422, 411, DV, DVCAM)

The setting selected for setup menu

item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.

HD_REF (59.94Hz, 60Hz)

SD_REF (59.94Hz)

50 1080/50i (HD_LP)

1080/50i (HD_LP, HD_SP)

576/50i (422, 411, DV, DVCAM)

576/25p over 50i (422, 411, DV)

HD_REF (50Hz)

SD_REF (50Hz)

23/24 None

720/23.98p over 59.94p (HD_SP/HD_SP)

720/24p over 60.00p (HD_SP/HD_SP)

480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3 mode]

480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3:3:2 advance mode]

HD_REF (47.96Hz, 48Hz)

The setting selected for setup menu

item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.

25 (HD) None 720/25p over 60p

HD_REF (50Hz)

SD_REF (50Hz)

25 (SD) None 720/25p over 60p SD_REF (50Hz)

The setting selected for setup menu

item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.

<Selecting the recording/playback format and sync signals which support the

operation mode>

106

2F 2F

Setup menus

The system menu and setup menu have some items whose settings differ and other items with which no

selection options are displayed and whose settings are fixed (indicated by the shading in the table below),

depending on the switching of the operation mode in response to the setting selected for system menu item

No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ). (Refer to the table below.)

<50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector registration

• When the items whose settings differ have been

registered in the <50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector

pins, the settings corresponding to the operation

modes are allocated to the IN and OUT pins on the

basis of the setting numbers. However, when the

upper limit value is exceeded, the value will be

limited to this upper limit.

What has been registered is saved, but bear in mind

that when the data is registered again, it is saved by

overwriting the existing data so that the previously

registered data will be lost.

• If items, whose selection options are not displayed

due to the operation mode, have been registered in

the <50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector, when an

operation mode in which these options are not

displayed is selected, what has been registered is

saved but no operation is possible. Bear in mind,

however, that when the data is registered again, it is

saved by overwriting the existing data so that the

previously registered data will be lost.

System menu and setup menu settings

• Each of the items whose settings differ is saved in

the VTR MEMORY (current file and one of the

backup files 1 to 4). The settings that correspond to

each operation mode will be displayed so that the

settings can be performed for each operation mode.

Registration of the <PF1> and <PF2> function

buttons

• When the items whose settings differ have been

registered in the <PF1> and <PF2> function buttons,

the settings that correspond to each operation mode

will be displayed so that the settings can be performed

for each operation mode.

• If items, whose selection options are not displayed due

to the operation mode, have been registered in the

<PF1> or <PF2> function button, when an operation

mode in which these options are not displayed is

selected, what has been registered is saved but the

function button itself will become blank and cannot be

operated. Bear in mind, however, that when the data is

registered again, it is saved by overwriting the existing

data so that the previously registered data will be lost

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 50 25 (HD)

12 SYS H (HD) COARSE

j5H to 0H to 5H

FINE

j1100 to 0 to 1100

j5H to 0H to 5H

j1375 to 0 to 1375

j1320 to 0 to 1320

15 VO SYS H (SD) COARSE j5H to 0H to 5H j5H to 0H to 5H

FINE j858 to 0 to 858 j864 to 0 to 864

16 SD SYS D (SD) COARSE j5H to 0H to 5H j5H to 0H to 5H

FINE j858 to 0 to 858 j864 to 0 to 864

SYS SC (SD) j108 to 0 to 108 j115 to 0 to 115

System menu

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 50 25 (HD)

502

2F/4F 2F/4F/8F109 CAP.LOCK

501 VITC POS-1

VITC POS-2

600 VIDEO IN SEL

10L to 16L to 20L

INTSG

HDSDI

SDTI

SDSDI

7L to 11L to 22L

INTSG

HDSDI

SDSDI

25 (SD)

7L to 11L to 22L

10L to 18L to 20L

7L to 13L to 22L 7L to 13L to 22L

Setup menus

(Continued on next page)

25 (SD)

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

60/24

107

Setup menus

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 50 25 (HD)

d12h

24h

Same as for

59/60

002 TAPE TIMER

OFF

004 SYNCHRONIZE

MANU

AUTO

010 MONI CONTROL

0s to 3s to 5s012 REC ADJUST

OFF

013 DET STOP

AUTO

INPUT

HD_REF

SD_REF

HD_REF

Same as for

59/60

Same as for

59/60

031 OUT REF

S/F/R

STOP

105 AUTO EE SEL

NORMAL

THRU

107 EE MODE SEL

OFF

111 MEMORY STOP

OFF

ALL

PRE

NORMAL

V/CTL

ALL ALL113 REC INH

REC

OFF

115 EJECT SW INH

OFF

118 SP MODE INH

OFF

LOW

HIGH

135 DET BEEP

TAPE TAPE TAPE140 OUTPUT

REC

AUTO

141 VOLUME

OUT

IN/OUT

142 AUDIO UNITY

PB PB

OUT OUT

CUT

FADE

303 AUD EDIT IN

CUT

FADE

304 AUD EDIT OUT

PLAYER

RECORDER

306 CF ADJ SEL

ALL

TAPE

OUT

j8f to 0f to 3s10f

014 DET ADJUST

Setup menus

59/23

60/24 Same as for

59/60 60/24030 HD FREQUENCY

1080i

720p 720p 1080i 720p

25 (SD)

SD_REF

720p020 SYS FORMAT

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

OFFOFF

Same as for

59/60

PRE PRE

Same as for

59/60

108

BLANK

THRU BLANK BLANK500 VITC BLANK

Setup menus

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 25 (HD) 25 (SD)

N-DEF

CH1

CH2

CH1+3

320 EDIT RPLCE1

321 EDIT RPLCE2

322 EDIT RPLCE3

323 EDIT RPLCE4

Same as for

59/60

324 EDIT RPLCEC

REGEN

PRE

AUTO PRE503 TCG MODE

TC&UB

505 TCG REGEN

AS&IN

ASSEM

INSRT

506 REGEN MODE

INT

EXT_L

SLTC

SVITC

507 TC SOURCE

REC

FREE

504 RUN MODE

NDF

V OUT

TC IN

512 TC OUT REF

NDF NDF NDF511 DF MODE

000 to 111508 BINARY GP

OFF

510 TCG CF FLAG

OFF

EDIT

516 TC OUT ADV

MOMENT

LATCH

517 TCG OUT

100%CB to EQ601 VIDEO INT SG

DR OFF

DR ON

602 SDI IN MODE

FIELD

FRAME

604 FREEZE SEL

OFF

AUTO

605 INTERPOLATE OFF

FIT_V

FIT_H

FIT_HV

14:9

13:9

620 DOWNCON MODE Same as for

59/60

FIT_V

FIT_H

FIT_HV

621 UPCON MODE

STD

NARROW

624 U/C RESP H

Same as for

59/60

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

109

Setup menus

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 50 25 (HD) 25 (SD)

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

BLANK

1080i

720p

- - -

634 480p #HD OUT

480p

480i

635 480p #SD OUT

1080i

720p

- - -

636 480i #HD OUT

480i

480p

637 480i #SD OUT

FIT_V

FIT_H

FIT_HV

Same as for

59/60

638 IN U/C MODE

STD

NARROW

639 I U/C RESP H

STD

NARROW

640 I U/C RESP V

Pb-Pr

U-V Same as for

59/60

651 HUE STYLE

OFF

676 BLK CLIP

BLANK

THRU BLANK BLANK680 CC (F1) BLANK

BLANK

THRU BLANK681 CC (F2) BLANK

THRU

ADD22

ADD21

ADD20 Same as for

59/60

682

(525 system

only)

VO SETUP (HD)

THRU

ADD22

ADD21

ADD20

683

(525 system

only)

VO SETUP (SD)

0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB

641 I U/C ENH H

0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB

BLANK

642 I U/C ENH V

1080i

720p

1080i

630 1080i #HD OUT

480i

- - -

480p

631 1080i #SD OUT

1080i

720p

632 720p #HD OUT

- - -

480i

480p

633 720p #SD OUT

STD

NARROW Same as for

59/60 Same as for

59/60

625 U/C RESP V

0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB

628 U/C ENH H

0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB

629 U/C ENH V

Same as for

59/60

25 (SD)

110

Setup menus

No. Menu item System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)

59/60 23/24 50 25 (HD)

Setup menus

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

719 CH7 IN SEL

720 CH8 IN SEL

AES

SDI

721 D IN SEL 12

722 D IN SEL 34

723 D IN SEL 56

724 D IN SEL 78

CH1 to CH3i4

725 REC CH1

726 REC CH2

727 REC CH3

728 REC CH4

CH5 to CH7i8

729 REC CH5

730 REC CH6

731 REC CH7

732 REC CH8

CUE to CH1j8733 REC CUE

AUTO

CUT

FADE CUT CUT734 PB FADE

DIS

ENA

749 AUDIO PB VR

OFF

760 REC PT MUTE

TONE

SILNCE SILNCE SILNCE761 AUDIO INT SG

16 to 0 to j16790 CUE REC VOL

INT SG

DIGI

ANA

713 CH1 IN SEL

714 CH2 IN SEL

715 CH3 IN SEL

716 CH4 IN SEL

717 CH5 IN SEL

718 CH6 IN SEL

OFF

688 CC REC

Same as for

59/60

BLANK

THRU

MANU

695 BLANK LINE

4dB

0dB

j20dB

700 CH1 IN LV

701 CH2 IN LV

702 CH3 IN LV

703 CH4 IN LV

4dB

0dB

j20dB

j60dB

704 CUE IN LV

Same as for

59/60

OFF

686 CCR MODE

OFF

687 SDI INDEX O

111

Time code and user’s bit

Time code

The time code is used when the time code signal

generated by the time code generator (time code

signal generator) is to be recorded on the tape, its

values are to be read by the time code reader (time

code signal reader), and the absolute position of the

tape is to be displayed in increments of hours,

minutes, seconds and frames.

The time code is written in the sub-code area (data

area) of the helical track. This enables insert editing

to be conducted independently using the time code

alone. In addition, the VTR’s playback speed can be

read from the stop mode to the slow motion playback

up to high-speed playback (approx. 50knormal

speed or approx. 100knormal speed when using a

DVCPRO tape).

The time code values are indicated on the display and

superimposed display.

TCR 00 : 07 : 04 : 23

tttt

Hours Minutes Seconds Frames

User’s bit

The “user’s bit” refers to the 32-bit (8-digit) data frame

among the time code signals which has been released

to users. It enables operator numbers and other

values to be recorded.

The alphanumerics which can be used for the user’s

bit are number 0 to 9 and letters A to F.

Setting the internal time code

1Set the VTR to the stop mode.

4Setting RUN MD on the <TC> menu

REC:

The time code advances simultaneously with the

recording.

FREE:

The time code advances, like time, irrespective of

the VTR operation.

5Setting TCG MD on the <TC> menu

REGEN:

The continuity of the underlying time code in place

prior to editing is maintained.

PRE:

The time code can be preset using the operation

panel controls or remote controller.

AUTO:

The time code is automatically switched to REGEN

or PRE depending on the VTR

’

s operation mode:

during editing, REGEN is selected; at all other

times, PRE is selected.

6Registering the TC preset values

Display the <HOME> menu.

<TC/UB>

•Preset (in the preset enable status)

1When among the number keys is pressed,

the TC display switches to TCG (UBG), and

the TCG value characters (all digits) are

highlighted.

2When is pressed again, one digit is

highlighted, and the change enable status is

established.

3Input the desired value using the number

keys. The entire input value can be cleared

by pressing while holding down .

4To input the letters used with the user

’

s bit,

press the same number key (toggle by

tapping or ) while holding down . To

move from one digit to another, turn the ADJ

dial.

5To enter the value, press the key.

6When the display screen has been changed

during the input process or if the button

has been pressed, the change enable status

is released, and the setting is canceled.

<CTL>

•Reset

Press (TC CLR).

ENT

F87

2Set TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.

3Set SOURCE on the <TC> menu to INT (for

selecting the internal time code).

112

Concerning the time code and user’s bit

Setting the external time code

1Set the VTR to the stop mode.

3If the video input has been set to HD SDI input or

INT SG, set TC SRC on the <TC> menu to

EXT-L, SLTC or SVITC.

4If the video input has been set to SD SDI (when

the optional board has been installed), set TC

SRC on the <TC> menu to EXT-L or VITC.

2Set TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.

Cue time registration, preroll and

cue-up

(These functions work only on the HOME, PF1 and

PF2 screens.)

• Registration

while holding down the button.

• Presetting

When the button is pressed, the characters of

the cue time or TC/UB display are highlighted.

Turn the ADJ dial to highlight the characters of the

cue time.

The subsequent steps in the registration procedure

are the same as for TCG.

• Prerolling

Press the PREROLL button to preroll the tape to

the currently registered CUE point.

• Cue-up

Press the PREROLL button while holding down the

button to cue the tape up to the currently

registered CUE point.

SET

Time code and user’s bit playback

1Set the VTR to the stop mode.

3Press the PLAY button. Playback starts, and the

time code appears on the display.

If (SUPER) on the <TC SHIFT> menu is set to

ON, the time code value is superimposed onto the

video signals from the VIDEO OUT3 connector.

<Notes>

• While a drop frame time code is being read, the

colon between the seconds and frames is replaced

with a period.

• If the time code signal is missing, it is interpolated

automatically using the CTL signal.

The following appears on the display.

2Set TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC or

UB.

TC:

The time code is displayed.

UB:

The user’s bit is displayed.

• In the event that it has become impossible to

read the time code, it is interpolated using the

CTL signal.

T ¢ R 00:01:04:07¢

An asterisk (¢)

appears here if the

time code signal is

missing.

“ ”: 1st, 3rd field

“¢”: 2nd, 4th fields

In the drop frame mode, the colon

between the seconds and frames

is replaced with a period. (In the

59/60 Hz mode only)

113

Display position

The position of the characters superimposed on the

display can be changed using (C HPOS) and

(C VPOS) on the <TC SHIFT> menu and the ADJ

dial.

F3F2

Superimpose screen

The control signals, time code, etc. are displayed on

this screen using abbreviations.

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

TV monitor

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

TV monitor

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

TV monitor

Abbreviations

CTL: Control signal count value

TCR: Time code data recorded in the SBC area

TCR.: Time code data recorded in the VAUX area

UBR: User’s bit data recorded in the SBC area

UBR.: User’s bit data recorded in the VAUX area

TCG: Time code data of the time code generator

UBG: User’s bit data of the time code generator

Operation mode

The VTR’s operation mode can also be displayed

using (DISPLY) on the <TC SHIFT> menu.

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

STOP

TV monitor

VTR operation mode

Characters displayed

The background of the characters superimposed on

the display screen can be changed using (C

TYPE) on the <TC SHIFT> menu.

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

TV monitor

TCR 22 : 22 : 22 : 22

TV monitor

<Note>

When the 23/24 Hz mode has been selected as the

system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,

the time code and other information superimposed on

the MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors are not

displayed.

<Note>

[T2R], [T2R.], [U2R] or [U2R.] is displayed when the

data has not been read correctly from the tape.

114

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

Selecting the audio recording channels and monitor output

Audio recording channels

The audio channels can be selected as shown below

using the AUDIO setup menu items.

Recording

track

CH1

Signals recorded

CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,

CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input

CH2 CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,

CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input

CH3 CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,

CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input

CH4 CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,

CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input

CH5 CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,

CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input

CH6 CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,

CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input

CH7 CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,

CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input

CH8 CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,

CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input

CUE

CUE input, CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4

input, CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8

input, CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input,

CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input, CH1–CH8 input

Monitor output channels

When (M MIX) on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu is

set to L, R or L/R, the signals of a multiple number of

channels can be mixed and output.

When the number key corresponding to the channel

whose signals are to be monitored is pressed while

the “L” (or “R”) button is held down, that channel is

selected, and its signals are displayed on the audio

level meter. (The same steps can also be taken to

de-select a channel which has already been selected.)

However, only up to 2 channels among the CH1-CH4

channels and only up to 2 channels among the CH5-

CH8 channels are selected.

(Examples: CH1 + CH3 + CH5 + CH8 can be selected

but CH1 + CH2 + CH4 cannot be selected.)

Number keys

MONITOR SELECT switches

115

Display saving function

This function is provided to extend the service life of the

LCD monitor. It starts up if none of the front panel

controls have been operated or the cassette tape has not

been run at all for about 5 minutes.

While the saving function is working, the LCD monitor

display goes blank, and the “EX” symbol appears on the

time code display area.

To release the saving function, operate a button or dial

on the front panel or issue a tape transport command

from the controller. The operation performed to release

the function will be executed after the function is

released.

116

ABCDEF GH

2Attach the outer member brackets to the rack.

Check that the height is the same for the left and

right brackets.

3Remove the four screws at the front used to attach

the left and right side panels.

4Attach the AJ-MA75P rack-mounting adapters

using the same four screws.

1Attach the inner members of the slide rails. Refer

to the figure below for the positions where they are

screwed into place.

The unit can be mounted into a 19-inch standard rack

if the optional rack-mounting adapters (AJ-MA75P)

are used. For the installation rails, it is recommended

that the rail and bracket for 18-inch length (part

number CC3061-99-0400) of Chassis Trak be used. If

an even greater clearance is to be left between the

VTR and rack when the VTR is pulled out, however, it

is recommended that the 22-inch long Chassis Trak

(part number CC-3001-99-0191) be used.

(The complete slide rail and bracket unit is not

available from Panasonic.)

For further details, consult your dealer.

Rack mounting

<Notes>

• The length of the screws used is subject to a

restriction.

• Use screws which are less than 2/5q(10 mm)

long.

•

Attach the inner member at the same symmetrical

positions on the left (L) side as well. Fix the

members in place using 3 screws on each side

(total: 6 screws). When using the 22-inch long slide

rails, secure the screws at 4 locations.

• The letters shown in the figure are not actually

marked on the side panels.

Inner member (18-inch rail)

ABCDEF GH

Inner member (22-inch rail)

Positions where the right (R) inner

member is screwed into place

Rack-mounting adapters

5Remove the four rubber feet on the bottom panel

of the VTR, and install the VTR in the rack.

After the VTR has been installed, check that it

moves smoothly along the rails.

EIA standard rack

Fasten to rack with the

fixing screws.

• Keep the temperature inside the rack to between

41xF and 104xF(5

xC and 40xC).

• Bolt the rack securely to the floor so that it will not

topple over when the VTR is pulled out.

117

This VTR is equipped with an auto head cleaning

function which automatically reduces the amount of

dirt on the video heads. In order to maximize the

VTR’s reliability, however, it is recommended that the

video heads be cleaned as and when appropriate.

For further details on how to actually clean the heads,

consult with one of Panasonic’s service companies or

with your dealer.

Video head cleaning

Condensation occurs due to the same principle which

is involved when droplets of water form on a window

pane of a heated room. It occurs when the VTR or

tape is moved between places where the temperature

or humidity varies greatly or when, for instance:

• It is moved to a very humid place full of steam or a

room immediately after it has been heated up.

• It is suddenly moved from a cold location to a hot or

humid location.

After moving the VTR to such a location, leave it

standing for about 10 minutes rather than switching on

its power immediately.

If condensation has formed on or in the VTR, the

AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the cassette tape is

automatically ejected. Keep the power supplied and

simply wait until the AUTO OFF lamp goes off.

It is recommended that the video heads be cleaned

after the AUTO OFF lamp has gone off.

Condensation

Before proceeding with maintenance, be absolutely

sure to set the power switch to OFF and take hold of

the power plug and unplug it from the power outlet.

Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet. To remove

stubborn dirt, dilute some kitchen detergent, dip a

cloth into the solution, wring it out well, and wipe.

After having removed the dirt, take up any remaining

moisture using a dry cloth.

<Note>

Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinners or other

solvents. They can discolor the external parts

surfaces and remove the finish.

Maintenance

118

When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning lamp

lights up.

When the DIAG menu is opened, a description of the

warning will appear on the front panel LCD area and

TV monitor. Also, when an abnormal operation is

detected in this VTR, the AUTO OFF lamp lights up,

and a message appears on the time code display

area.

DIAG menu

This displays the VTR information.

The VTR information includes the warning information

and hour-meter (usage time) information. The DIAG

menu appears on the front panel LCD display or on a

TV monitor when the TV monitor is connected to the

VIDEO OUT3 connector in the VTR’s connector area.

∫Displaying the DIAG menu

Error messages

1Press the DIAG button.

The DIAG menu screen is now displayed on the

TV monitor.

2The warning information is displayed by pressing

(WARN) on the time code display area, and

the hour-meter information is displayed by pressing

(HOURS) on this area.

The display of the hour-meter information is

scrolled using the ADJ dial.

3To exit the DIAG menu, press any other direct

menu button.

∫Displaying the warning information

• A warning message is displayed whenever a

warning occurs (the warning lamp lights up). When

no warnings have been detected, “NO WARNING”

is displayed.

• When a multiple number of warnings occur, the

descriptions of each warning can be checked by

turning the ADJ dial.

POWER

OFF

HEADPHONES

PUSH

LOCK

FULL

CH CONDITION

MONITOR

FULL/FINE

REMOTE

9P 50P

RS-232C

12345678

CUE

XL/L/M

cassette

Do not insert S-cassette

without adapter

EJECT

AUDIO CH SELECT

SHIFT

ABC DEF GHI

JKL MNO PQRS

PREVIEW/

REVIEW

PRE-

ROLL

A IN A OUT

HOME RF1 ASSEM

ADJUST

SHTL

REV FWD

VARJOG

STAND BY

RECORDER INPUT CHECK

PLAYER

SERVO

EDIT PLAY REC

REW STOP FF

REC INHIBIT

PUSH-INTER

INSERT

RF2

VIDEO UNITY TC CUE

AUDIO UNITY DIAG MENU

TRIM

SET

OUT

AUTO

EDIT

789

456BS

TUV WXYZ

123

ENT

0CT F

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

FULL

REC P8 REC P8 REC P8 REC P8

ADJ dial

119

If “T&S&M” has been selected as the setup menu item

No.006 (DISPLAY SEL) setting, a message appears

in the mode display area whenever a warning or error

has occurred. When a multiple number of errors have

occurred, the one with the highest priority is displayed.

Error messages

Priority Display and description

Higher

Lower

Error messages (see error message table): When any

problem arises with the VTR’s operation, the AUTO OFF

lamp lights, and an error message is displayed.

INT SG: If, when “INT SG” has been selected as the audio

input setting by (VID IN) on the <VIDEO> menu or by the

<AUDIO> or <AUDIO SHIFT1> menu, and the EDIT button is

pressed, this message is displayed for the first two seconds

when editing is started. In the same way, it is displayed for the

first two seconds when recording is started.

NO INPUT: If, when input signals (but not analog audio

signals) are not supplied to the input connector selected by

(VID IN) on the <VIDEO> menu or by the <AUDIO> or

<AUDIO SHIFT1> menu, the EDIT button is pressed, this

message is displayed for the first two seconds when editing

is started. In the same way, it is displayed for the first two

seconds when recording is started.

Warning messages (see warning message table): When

a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning lamp lights, and a

warning message is displayed. When a multiple number of

warnings have occurred, the one with the highest priority is

displayed.

∫Displaying the hour-meter information

Turn the ADJ dial to move the cursor (¢), and the

description for the item where the cursor is located is

shown as a superimposed display.

<Note>

The resettable table hour-meter information items will

be reset by your dealer when maintenance or other

work is performed.

No./Item Description

H00

OPERATION

Displays in 1-hour increments the time during

which power has been supplied.

H01

DRUM RUN

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of

time during which the drum has rotated.

H02

TAPE RUN

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time during

which the tape has been running in the FF, REW, PLAY,

SEARCH (JOG, VAR and SHTL), REC and EDIT modes (but

not in the JOG, VAR, SHTL or STILL mode).

H03

THREADING

Displays in 1-time increments the number of

times the tape has been threaded (loaded) and

unthreaded (unloaded).

H04

F LOADING

Displays in 1-time increments the number of

front loading operations.

H05

LCD ON

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of

time during which the LCD monitor has lighted.

H15

LCD ON r

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of

time during which the LCD monitor has lighted.

(Can be reset.)

H11

DRUM RUNr

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of

time during which the drum has rotated.

(Can be reset.)

H13

THREADINGr

Displays in 1-time increments the number of

times the tape has been threaded (loaded) and

unthreaded (unloaded). (Can be reset.)

H30

POWER ON

Displays the number of times the power has

been turned on.

H12

TAPE RUNr

Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time

during which the tape has been running in the FF,

REW, PLAY, SEARCH (JOG, VAR and SHTL),

REC and EDIT modes (but not in the JOG, VAR,

SHTL or STILL mode). (Can be reset.)

H14

F LOADINGr

Displays in 1-time increments the number of

front loading operations.

(Can be reset.)

120

Higher

Lower

Error messages

Display •Description

•VTR operation and remedial action

Warning messages

Error messages

Priority •Display

•Description

•VTR operation and remedial action

SERVO NOT LOCKED

This is displayed when the servo is not locked for 3 or more

seconds during playback, recording or editing.

VTR: Operation continues.

• Check the tape. A tape recorded using a system which

does not allow playback may have been inserted

HIGH ERROR RATE

This is displayed when the error rate increases and

correction or interpolation is performed for either the video

or audio signals.

VTR: Operation continues.

• Clean the video heads.

LOW RF

This is displayed when a state in which the envelope level

has dropped to less than one-third of its normal level has

been detected for 1 or more seconds or when a state in

which the CTL signal level has dropped to less than one-

sixth of its normal level has been detected for 1 or more

seconds during playback, recording or editing.

• The CTL signal level is not detected during DV or

DVCAM playback.

• During recording or editing, the envelope level of only the

video simultaneous play heads is detected.

VTR: Operation continues.

• Clean the video heads and A/C head.

INVALID TC MODE (in 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)

mode)

This is displayed during playback if the time code has been

recorded in the drop frame mode. The video output is

disturbed and the audio output is muted at the time code

drop point.

VTR: Operation continues.

• Check the tape. If a tape recorded using a variable frame

rate camera is to be played back in this VTR, the time

code must be recorded in the non-drop frame mode.

TC SEQUENCE UNMATCH (in 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or

SD) mode)

This is displayed during playback if the correlation between

the active frame information and time code is irregular. The

video output may not be uniform (the movements may not

be smooth).

VTR: Operation continues.

• Check the tape. The active frame (first frame where the

frame video is switched) information is recorded on a

tape recorded using a variable frame rate camera. When

such a tape is played back on this VTR, the 0 frame of

the time code must be detected at the active frame

position.

FAN STOP

This is displayed when the fan motor has stopped.

VTR: Operation continues (and a warning beep is sounded

regardless of the menu setting.)

• Check that no foreign matter has accumulated on the fan.

NO RF

This is displayed when a blank part of the tape lasting for 1

or more seconds has been detected during playback.

When all of the following conditions have been met, it will be

recognized as a blank part.

• When no signals are output from any of the heads

• When the playback data cannot be read

• When the CTL signal is not present

VTR: Operation continues.

• Check the tape. An unrecorded tape may have been

inserted.

CAP ROTA

TOO SLOW

If the rotational speed of the capstan motor is

abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

CAP TENSION

ERROR

If an abnormal tension is detected at the supply side in

the capstan mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

DEW

When condensation has been detected, the AUTO OFF

lamp lights, the message display blinks, and the VTR

transfers to the EJECT mode. After the tape has been

ejected, the drum continues to rotate in order to dry out

the condensation.

When the condensation has cleared, the AUTO OFF

lamp goes off, the message display is cleared, and the

VTR is ready for operation again.

• When condensation is detected in the EJECT mode,

the drum starts rotating as soon as it is detected.

• When condensation is detected while a cassette is

inserted, the drum stops rotating and starts rotating

again after the tape has been ejected.

VTR: EJECT

• Wait with the power on.

DRUM ROTA

TOO FAST

If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is

abnormally high, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

DRUM ROTA

TOO SLOW

If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is

abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

E-FF

If the tape start and tape end are detected at the same

time either during or after loading, the AUTO OFF lamp

lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

FRONT LOAD

ERROR

If the take-up reel has turned without engaging the tape

for a specific period of time during the tape start or end

processing operation while loading is being performed

(at the half position), the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and

the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

121

Error messages

Display •Description

•VTR operation and remedial action

T REEL

TORQUE ERR

If an abnormal torque applied to the take-up reel motor

is detected, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

S REEL

TORQUE ERR

If an abnormal torque applied to the supply reel motor

is detected or if an abnormal current flowing to the

current-sensing resistor is detected, the AUTO OFF

lamp lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

If the error message display persists even after the

VTR has been shut down and started up again,

consult your dealer.

UNLOAD

ERROR

If the tape has not been wound up during unloading,

the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message display

blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

WINDUP

ERROR

If, after the total tape amount has been detected, the

amount of tape wound up onto the take-up reel and the

amount of tape supplied by the supply reel differ to an

abnormal extent while the tape is traveling, the AUTO

OFF lamp lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

W-UP REEL

NOT ROTA

If, after the cassette has been inserted, the tape take-

up reel has not wound up the tape while the total tape

amount is not detected and while the tape is traveling,

the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message display

blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

Error messages

S-FF/REW

TIMEOVER

When the tape start or end processing operation is not

completed, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

T REEL ROTA

TOO FAST

If the take-up reel motor rotates at an abnormally fast

rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message

display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

S REEL ROTA

TOO FAST

If the supply reel motor rotates at an abnormally fast

rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message

display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

Display •Description

•VTR operation and remedial action

FRONT LOAD

MOTOR

If the cassette fails to move up even after 6 seconds

have elapsed since the VTR transferred to the EJECT

mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message

display blinks.

<Note>

If the cassette fails to move down even after 6 seconds

have elapsed since the cassette was inserted, the VTR

transfers to the EJECT mode.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

MOTOR

If the unloading operation fails to be completed within 6

seconds, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message

display blinks.

<Note>

If the loading operation fails to be completed within 6

seconds, the VTR transfers to the EJECT mode

(unloading mode).

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

REEL DIR

UNMATCH

If the take-up reel motor is running in the reverse

direction, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message

display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

REEL

TENSION

ERROR

If an abnormal tension at the supply side is detected in

the reel mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the

message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

SERVO COMM

ERROR

When the servo microcomputer does not follow the

instructions of the system control microcomputer even

after 10 seconds have elapsed, the AUTO OFF lamp

lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

SERVO

CONTROL

ERROR

When there is no response from the servo

microcomputer for 1 or more seconds, the AUTO OFF

lamp lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

SERVO

ERROR

When only the servo microcomputer was reset in an

instantaneous power failure, etc., the AUTO OFF lamp

lights, and the message display blinks.

VTR: Stops.

• Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON

again.

122

The VTR can be operated by commands when the

RS-232C interface is used. (Refer to the command

tables on page 125 and 126.)

∫Condition for acknowledging

commands from RS-232C interface

Setup menu item No.204 (RS232C SEL): ON

If the above condition is not met,

[ACK]+[STX]ER001[EXT] is returned to the external

component. Whether [ACK] is returned depends on

the setting which has been selected for setup menu

item No.209 (RETURN ACK).

Hardware specifications

External interface specifications

RS-232C interface

•Connector pin specifications

Connector: D-SUB 25-pin

(crossover cable supported)

Pin No. Signal Description

1FG Protective ground (frame ground)

2RXD Received data (data is sent to PC)

3TXD Transmitted data (data is received

from PC)

4CTS Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)

5RTS Request to send (shorted with pin 4)

6DTR Data terminal ready (no processing)

7SG Signal ground

20 DSR Data set ready (+ voltage output after

communication enable status)

•Example of connection with controller (PC)

(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 25-pin

connectors)

PC side

(D-SUB 25-pin connector)

VTR side

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

DSR

DTR

RXD

TXD

CTS

RTS

DTR

DSR

(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 9-pin and D-

SUB 25-pin connectors)

PC side

(D-SUB 9-pin connector)

VTR side

RXD

TXD

DTR

DSR

RTS

CTS

RXD

TXD

CTS

RTS

DTR

DSR

123

Software specifications (protocol)

1. Communication parameters

RS-232C interface

Communication

system Asynchronous, full duplex

Transfer rate 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps

Bit length 7 bits or 8 bits

Stop bit 1 bit or 2 bits

Parity bit None, odd or even

ACK code Returned or not returned

<Note>

ACK is the code which is returned from the

VTR to the controller when data has been

successfully sent from the controller.

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

Communication

parameter Setup menu item

Transfer rate No.205 BAUD RATE

Bit length No.206 DATA LENGTH

Stop bit No.207 STOP BIT

Parity bit No.208 PARITY

ACK code No.209 RETURN ACK

Any changes to the settings can be made using the

setup menu items listed below.

2. Send format

[controller (PC) >VTR]

∫Data format

[STX] [command] [:] [data] [ETX]

02h XX XX XX 3Ah XX.....XX 03h

20H<XX<7FH

(XX=ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-

case letters)

[command]:

This is the command identifier (3 bytes).

A 3-byte identifier (ASCII code: symbols,

numbers, upper-case letters) is sent as the

command.

[:]

The colon is the code serving as a delimiter

between the command and data.

[data]:

Data (ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-

case letters) can be added in the number of

bytes required.

∫Outline of procedure for sending data from

controller

1The send command starts with STX (start of

text = 02h). The command is then identified

by COMMAND which follows, and the data is

added as required.

The command ends with ETX (end of text =

03h).

2When a different command is to be sent, a

response is awaited from the VTR, and then

the command is sent. (See page 124.)

3If STX is sent again before ETX is sent, the

receive data buffer inside the VTR is cleared.

A command error is returned to the

controller, and the data is newly processed

with STX which was received again at the

head.

124

RS-232C interface

3. Return format

[VTR >controller (PC)]

The following responses are made to the

commands. If necessary, more than one

response is made.

∫When the communication has ended

successfully

1. The receive completion message is returned.

[ACK]

06h

2. The execution completion message is

returned.

[STX] [command] [data] [ETX]

02h XX XX XX XX.....XX 03h

[command]:

This is the message (data) which is returned

or the execution completion message

identifier.

[data]:

This is the data to be returned. It can be

omitted.

Example:

Send command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Return message (data)

[

STX] OPL [ETX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

[ACK] [STX] OPL [ETX]

∫When the communication has ended

unsuccessfully

[NACK]

15h

∫When processing is not possible due to

incorrect data or problem with the VTR

1. The receive completion message is returned.

[ACK]

06h

2. An error code is returned.

[STX] [E R N1N2N3][ETX]

02h

Error code

03h

4. Error code table

ER001: Invalid command

• Unsupported command received

• Command execution error

ER002: Parameter error

ER102: VTR mode error

(front loading motor)

ER103: VTR mode error (loading motor)

ER104: VTR mode error (drum, capstan system)

ER105: VTR mode error (reel system)

ER106: VTR mode error (tension system)

ER108: VTR condensation error

ER1FF: VTR system error

125

RS-232C interface

5. Command table

∫Commands relating to operation control

<Notes>

• As the return (completion) message, [ACK] is

returned when data is received, and only the

execution message which is subsequently

returned is listed in the table.

• If a command not listed in the table is received,

ER001 (invalid command) is returned after

[ACK].

VTR

operation Send command

STOP

[STX] OSP [ETX] 45 [STX] OSP [ETX]

This command is for stopping the tape transport.

The resulting output picture and sound statuses

differ according to the setting selected for the

setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).

For details, refer to the setup menus.

Return (completion)

message

STANDBY

OFF

[STX] OBF [ETX] 45 [STX] OBF [ETX]

This command is for setting the VTR to standby

OFF.

STANDBY ON

[STX] OBN [ETX] 45 [STX] OBN [ETX]

This command is for setting the VTR to standby

ON.

VTR

operation Send command

SHTL

FORWARD

[STX] OSF:data [ETX]

45 [STX] OSF [ETX]

This is the forward direction shuttle command.

data = n: speed data

0: STILL

1: k0.03

2: k0.1

3: k0.2

4: k0.5

5: k1

6: k2.0

(1.85kfor formats other than

DVCPROHD-LP)

7: k4.9

8: k9.8

9: k16

A: k32

<Note>

The 16kand 32kspeeds differ according to the

setting selected for setup menu item No.101

(SHTL MAX).

Return (completion)

message

SHTL

REVERSE

[STX] OSR:data [ETX]

45 [STX] OSR [ETX]

This is the reverse direction shuttle command.

data = n: speed data

0: STILL

1: k0.03

2: k0.1

3: k0.2

4: k0.5

5: k1

6: k2.0

(1.85kfor formats other than

DVCPROHD-LP)

7: k4.9

8: k9.8

9: k16

A: k32

<Note>

The 16kand 32kspeeds differ according to the

setting selected for setup menu item No.101

(SHTL MAX).

EJECT

[STX] OEJ [ETX] 45 [STX] OEJ [ETX]

This command is for ejecting the cassette tape.

The resulting output picture and sound statuses

differ according to the setting selected for the

setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).

For details, refer to the setup menus.

PLAY

[STX] OPL [ETX] 45 [STX] OPL [ETX]

This command is for starting playback.

REWIND

[STX] ORW [ETX] 45 [STX] ORW [ETX]

This command is for rewinding the tape. The

resulting output picture and sound statuses differ

according to the setting selected for the setup

menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).

The maximum speed differs according to the

setting selected for the setup menu item No.102

(FF. REW MAX).

For details, refer to the setup menus.

FAST

FORWARD

[STX] OFF [ETX] 45 [STX] OFF [ETX]

This command is for fast forwarding the tape.

The resulting output picture and sound statuses

differ according to the setting selected for the

setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).

The maximum speed differs according to the

setting selected for the setup menu item No.102

(FF. REW MAX).

For details, refer to the setup menus.

REC

[STX] ORC [ETX] 45 [STX] ORC [ETX]

This command is for starting recording.

126

RS-232C interface

∫Commands relating to inquiries

<Notes>

• In terms of the return (completion) message,

[ACK] is returned when data is received, and

only the execution message which is

subsequently returned is listed in the table.

• In the case of commands not listed in the table

below, ER001 (invalid command) is returned

after [ACK].

VTR

operation Send command

CTL/TC DATA

REQUEST

[STX] QCD [ETX] 45 [STX] CD data [ETX]

This command is for inquiring about the counter

value.

data = f w gh mm ss ff

f=F

w=S

gh =

With CTL:

g = SP(20h): for a plus display

j(2Dh): for a minus display

h = 0 to 9: hours

With TC:

gh = 00 to 23: hours

mm = 00 to 59: minutes

ss = 00 to 59: seconds

(525i system)

ff = 00 to 29: frames

<Note>

CTL or TC is returned, whichever corresponds to

the front display mode.

Return (completion)

message

STATUS

REQUEST

[STX] QOP [ETX] 45 [STX] 222 [ETX]

This command is for inquiring about the VTR’s

operation mode.

222 = OEJ: EJECT

OFF: FAST FORWARD

OPL: PLAY

ORC: REC

ORW: REWIND

OSP: STOP (including STANDBY ON)

SRS: (IN/OUT) PREROLL

OBF: STAND BY OFF

OSF: SHTL FORWARD

OSR: SHTL REVERSE

OJG: JOG FORWARD/REVERSE

OSW: VAR FORWARD/REVERSE

EAE: AUTO EDIT

EON: EDIT ON (MANUAL EDIT)

EPV: PREVIEW

ERV: REVIEW

ID (VTR No.)

REQUEST

[STX] QID [ETX] 45 [STX] data [ETX]

This command is for inquiring about the VTR

used.

data = AJ-HD1700

127

RS-232C interface

∫Microsoft QuickBASIC sample program

CLS

STX$ = CHR$(&H2): ETX$ = CHR$ (&H3): NAK$ = CHR$(15): ACK$ = CHR$(&H6)

PRINT "*** RS-232C COMMUNICATION SAMPLE PROGRAM ***"

PRINT "Type Command 'QUIT' to quit."

REM *** Communication Port Initial & Open ***

REM Port 1,9600Bps,No parity,8 bit data,1 stop bit

OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1" FOR RANDOM AS #1 LEN = 256

REM *** Input Command & Send Command ***

SendCmd:

INPUT "Input Command ="; SEND$

IF SEND$ = "QUIT" THEN GOTO ProgEnd

PRINT #1, STX$ + SEND$ + ETX$

REM *** Wait for Receive Command ***

WHILE LOC(1) = 0

WAITKEY$ = INKEY$

IF WAITKEY$ = "Q" THEN PRINT "*** Quit ***": GOTO ProgEnd

WEND

REM *** Receive Command ***

RecvCmd:

RECV$ = INPUT$(1, #1)

IF RECV$ = STX$ THEN RECV$ = "[Stx]"

IF RECV$ = ACK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Ack]"

IF RECV$ = NAK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Nak]"

IF RECV$ = ETX$ THEN BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + "[Etx]": GOTO DispOut

BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + RECV$

GOTO RecvCmd

REM *** Output Receive Command ***

DispOut:

PRINT "Receive Command ="; BUFFER$

BUFFER$ = ""

GOTO SendCmd

REM *** End Program ***

ProgEnd:

END

Microsoft QuickBASIC is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

128

Connector signals

VIDEO IN

HD SERIAL IN

(DIGITAL) BNC k1, active-through (BNC k1)

HD REF IN BNC k2, loop-through, 75™termination

switch provided

SD REF IN BNC k2, loop-through, 75™termination

switch provided

SD SERIAL IN

(DIGITAL) BNC k1, active-through (BNC k1) (board,

option)

SDTI IN BNC k1 (board, option)

VIDEO OUT

HD SERIAL OUT

(DIGITAL)

BNC k 4

SD SERIAL OUT

(DIGITAL)

BNC k 2

VIDEO OUT BNC k 3

HD REF OUT BNC k 1

SD REF OUT BNC k 1

SDTI OUT BNC k1 (board, option)

AUDIO IN

HD SERIAL IN

(DIGITAL) BNC k1, active-through (BNC k1)

AUDIO IN

(DIGITAL) BNC k 4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,

CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format

AUDIO IN

(ANALOG) XLR k 4 (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)

CUE IN XLR k 1

TIME CODE IN XLR k 1

SD SERIAL IN

(DIGITAL) BNC k1, active-through (BNC k1) (board,

option)

AUDIO OUT

HD SERIAL OUT

(DIGITAL)

BNC k 4

AUDIO OUT

(DIGITAL)

BNC k 4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,

CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format

AUDIO OUT

(ANALOG) XLR k 4 (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)

CUE OUT XLR k 1

TIME CODE OUT XLR k 1

MONITOR OUT XLR k 2 (L, R)

HEADPHONES

(front) 1/4-inch (6.5 mm)

SD SERIAL OUT

(DIGITAL)

BNC k 2

RS-422A REMOTE (9P)

OREMOTE IN/OUT

Pin No. Signal

1FRAME GROUND

2TRANSMIT A

3RECEIVE B

4RECEIVE COMMON

5====

6TRANSMIT COMMON

7TRANSMIT B

8RECEIVE A

9FRAME GROUND

OREMOTE OUT

Pin No. Signal

1FRAME GROUND

2RECEIVE A

3TRANSMIT B

4TRANSMIT COMMON

5====

6RECEIVE COMMON

7RECEIVE B

8TRANSMIT A

9FRAME GROUND

CUE INPUT IMPEDANCE SW

This sets the CUE input impedance.

HIGH/600™

129

Connector signals

PARALLEL REMOTE (50P)

Refer to 50P IN/OUT ASSIGN on the function menu

(page 75) for the connection pin signals.

ENCODER REMOTE(15P)

Pin No. Signal

1FRAME GROUND

4REM (G)

7REM RX (X)

REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE

8REM TX (X)

REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT

14 REM RX (Y)

REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE

15 REM TX (Y)

REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT

RS-232C

(D-SUB 25-pin, crossover cable supported)

Pin No. Signal Description

1FG Protective ground (frame ground)

2RXD Received data (data is sent to PC)

3TXD Transmitted data (data is received

from PC)

4CTS Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)

5RTS Request to send (shorted with pin 4)

6DTR Data terminal ready (no processing)

7SG Signal ground

20 DSR Data set ready (+ voltage output after

communication enable status)

Printed circuit boards

F1 board (ADDA)

Switch No. What is set

SW1

SW101 AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW

This sets the CH2 audio input impedance.

HIGH/600™

SW201 AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW

This sets the CH3 audio input impedance.

HIGH/600™

SW301 AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW

This sets the CH4 audio input impedance.

HIGH/600™

The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.

AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW

This sets the CH1 audio input impedance.

HIGH/600™

H3 board (CUE)

Switch No. What is set

SW101

CAUTION:

These servicing instructions are for use by

qualified service personnel only. To reduce the

risk of fire or electric shock do not perform any

servicing other than that contained in the

operating instructions unless you are qualified

to do so.

130

[GENERAL]

indicates the safety information.

Power supply: AC 100–240V, 50–60 Hz (AJ-HD1700P)

AC 100–240V, 50–60 Hz (AJ-HD1700E)

Power consumption: 240W

Operating ambient temperature:

41xF to 104xF (5xC to 40xC)

Operating ambient humidity:

10% to 80% (no condensation)

Weight:

Approx. 48.4 lbs (22 kg)

Dimensions (W kH kD):

16-3/4 (max. 17-3/16 ) k6-15/16 k17-11/16 inches

(not including supporting feet, jacks and connectors, JOG

dial and fan)

424 (max. 435.4) k175.2 k448.9 mm

Recording format:

DVCPRO HD-LP

Video signals recorded:

1080i (50/59.94/60 Hz switchable)

720p (59.94/60 Hz switchable)

480i/59.94 Hz

576i/50 Hz (when optional board AJ-UC1700G is installed)

Audio signals recorded:

48 kHz, 16 bits, 8 channels

Recording tracks:

Digital video/audio:

helical tracks

(Time code is recorded in sub-code area.)

Cue track:

1 track

Control track:

1 track

Tape speed:

67.64 mm/sec. (in 59.94 Hz mode)

67.70 mm/sec. (in 60 or 50 Hz mode)

Tape used:

Metal tape

Recording time:

126 minutes (using XL cassette)

92 minutes (using L cassette)

32 minutes (using M cassette)

FF/REW time:

Approx. 1 min. 30 sec. (when XL cassette is used and

i100kor j100kspeed is selected)

Search speed:

d100k

Digital slow:

j1kto i2k(when playing back tapes recorded using the

DVCPRO HD-LP format)

j1kto i1.1k(when playing back tapes recorded using

any other format)

Editing accuracy:

d0 frames (when time code is used, in 50 Hz, 59.94 Hz or

60 Hz mode)

Tape timer accuracy:

d1 frame (when continuous CTL signal is used)

Servo lock time:

Less than 0.3 sec. (from standby ON)

Specifications

[VIDEO]

Sampling frequencies:

Y: 74.25 MHz, Pb/Pr: 37.125 MHz

Quantizing:

8 bits

Video compression method:

DCT ivariable length code

Video compression rate:

1/6.7

Error correction:

Reed-Solomon product code

Video recording bit rate:

100 Mbps

Video Input Connectors

HD serial digital input:

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 292M standard),

BNC k1 (active-through)

SD serial digital input (option):

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C standard),

BNC k1 (active-through)

SDTI input (option):

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 305M/SMPTE 321M

standards)*

HD reference input:

BNC k2 (loop-through), 75™ON/OFF selectable

SD reference input:

BNC k2 (loop-through), 75™ON/OFF selectable

Video Output Connectors

HD serial digital output:

BNC k3 (complies with SMPTE 292M standard),

BNC k1 (monitor output with superimposed display)

SD serial digital output:

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE 294M

standards),

BNC k1 (monitor output with superimposed display)

SDTI output (option):

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 305M/SMPTE 321M

standards)

HD reference output:

BNC k1

SD reference output:

BNC k1

Analog composite output:

BNC k3, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (WFM OUT), VIDEO 3

(superimposed ON/OFF), output during SD playback or

during down-conversion

* The optional AJ-UC1700G SD serial digital input board and

optional AJ-YAC150P SDTI input board cannot be installed at

the same time. Install one or the other.

Loading time:

Approx. 4 sec.

Audio split editing:

Provided

131

Specifications

[VIDEO]

Video signal adjustment ranges

• Component style

HD/SD SDI, composite output Y gain:

j¶ to i3 dB

HD/SD SDI, composite output Pb gain:

j¶ to i3 dB

HD/SD SDI, composite output Pr gain:

j¶ to i3 dB

HD/SD SDI, composite output Y black level:

w10%

• Composite style

HD/SD SDI, composite output video gain:

j¶ to i6 dB

HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma gain:

j¶ to i3 dB

HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma phase (*1):

w30x

HD/SD SDI, composite output Y setup:

w10%

• System phase

HD SDI output system phase

w5.5 H (w12100 sample, 13.5 nS step, 59/60Hz)

(w14520 sample, 50/25Hz)

(w15125 sample, 23/24Hz)

SD SDI output system phase

w5.5 H (w9438 sample, 480i: 37nS step,

480p: 54nS step)

(w9504 sample, 576i)

Composite video output system phase

w5.5 H (w9438 sample, 37nS step, 59Hz)

(w9504 sample, 37nS step, 50Hz)

Composite video output SC phase:

w180xor more

*1: Only the SD SDI composite output of SD tape playback is valid

in the 50 Hz or 25 Hz mode.

[AUDIO]

Cue Track

Frequency response:

300 Hz to 6 kHz w3 dB

Audio Input Connectors

Analog input (CH1 to CH4)

XLR k4, 600™/high impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20

dBu selectable

Digital input (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)

BNC k4, AES/EBU format

HD serial digital input

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 292M/SMPTE 299M

standards)

BNC k1 (active-through)

SD serial digital input (option)

BNC k1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE 272M-A

standards)

BNC k1 (active-through)

Cue track input

XLR k1, 600™/high impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20,

j60 dBu selectable

Audio output Connectors

Analog output (CH1 to CH4)

XLR k4, low impedance, i4, 0, j20 dBu selectable

Digital output (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)

BNC k4, AES/EBU format

HD serial digital output

BNC k4 (complies with SMPTE 292M/SMPTE 299M

standards)

SD serial digital output

BNC k2 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE

294M/SMPTE 272M-A standards)

Cue track output

XLR k1, low impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20 dBu

selectable

Monitor output

XLR k2, low impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20 dBu

selectable

Headphone output

1/4-inch phone (6.5 mm), 8™, variable level

Audio level adjustment range

j¶ to i12 dB

[AUDIO]

Digital Audio

Sampling frequency:

48 kHz (synchronized with video)

Quantizing:

16 bits

Frequency response:

20 Hz to 20 kHz w10 dB (at reference level)

Dynamic range:

Better than 90 dB (1 kHz, emphasis OFF)

Distortion:

Less than 0.05% (1 kHz, emphasis OFF, reference level)

Crosstalk:

Less than j80 dB (1 kHz, between 2 channels)

Wow & flutter:

Below measurable limit

Headroom:

20 dB (AJ-HD1700P)

18 dB (AJ-HD1700E)

132

Specifications

[OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES]

Rack-mounting adapters:

AJ-MA75P

SD-HD format converter board:

AJ-UC1700G

Encoder/decoder board supporting DVCPRO HD bank

data:

AJ-VNC150P

SDTI interface board:

AJ-YAC150P

Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

[OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS]

Time code input

XLR k1, 0.5 to 8.0 Vp-p, 10 k™

Time code output

XLR k1, low impedance

2.0 w0.5 Vp-p, (with 600™load)

RS-422A input

D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface

RS-422A output

D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface

RS-232C

D-sub 25-pin, RS-232C interface

Parallel input/output

D-sub 50-pin

Encoder remote

D-sub 15-pin

133

F0703H1@32

PANASONIC BROADCAST & TELEVISION SYSTEMS COMPANY

UNIT COMPANY OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Executive Office:

One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000

EASTERN ZONE:

One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7621

Southeast Region:

1225 Northbrook Parkway, Ste 1-160, Suwanee, GA 30024 (770) 338-6835

Central Region:

1707 N Randall Road E1-C-1, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5200

WESTERN ZONE:

3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500

Government Marketing Department:

52 West Gude Drive, Rockville, MD 20850 (301) 738-3840

Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:

9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880

Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881

TECHNICAL SUPPORT:

Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741

Panasonic Canada Inc.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010

Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.

Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127

Panasonic Sales Company

Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico Inc.

San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300

Panasonic Broadcast Europe

Panasonic Broadcast Europe Ltd

West Forest Gate, Wellington Road, Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 2AQ U.K. Tel: 0118 902 9200

Panasonic Broadcast Europe GmbH

Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-1816-0

Printed in Japan

Panasonic AJ HD1700 User Manual To The Ceb0c33f 1fab 4811 96e6 3330017ab52c

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation